Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Eclipse Pvti Reference Manual
Eclipse Pvti Reference Manual
Reference Manual
2008.1
Proprietary Notice
Copyright Schlumberger. All rights reserved.
No part of this document may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or translated in any form or by any means, electronic or
mechanical, including photocopying and recording, without the prior written permission of Schlumberger.
Use of this product is governed by the License Agreement. Use of this product is governed by the License Agreement. Schlumberger.
Schlumberger makes no warranties, express, implied, or statutory, with respect to the product described herein and disclaims without
limitation any warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose.
Patent information
Schlumberger ECLIPSE reservoir simulation software is protected by US Patents 6,018,497, 6,078,869 and 6,106,561, and UK Patents
GB 2,326,747 B and GB 2,336,008 B. Patents pending. Schlumberger FrontSim reservoir simulation software is protected by US Patent
2004/0015295A1.
Trademark information
Silicon Graphics and IRIX are registered trademarks of Silicon Graphics, Inc. OpenGL and the oval logo are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Silicon Graphics, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries worldwide. OpenInventor and WebSpace are trademarks
of Silicon Graphics, Inc. IBM, AIX and LoadLeveler are registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation. Sun,
SPARC, Solaris, Ultra and UltraSPARC are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. Macintosh is a registered
trademark of Apple Computer, Inc. UNIX is a registered trademark of UNIX System Laboratories. Motif is a registered trademark of the
Open Software Foundation, Inc. The X Window System and X11 are registered trademarks of the Massachusetts Institute of Technology.
PostScript and Encapsulated PostScript are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems, Inc. OpenWorks and VIP are registered trademarks
of Landmark Graphics Corporation. Lotus, 1-2-3 and Symphony are registered trademarks of Lotus Development Corporation. Microsoft,
Windows, Windows NT, Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows 2000, Windows XP, Internet Explorer, Intellimouse and PowerPoint are
either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Netscape is a registered
trademark of Netscape Communications Corporation. AVS is a registered trademark of AVS Inc. ZEH is a registered trademark of ZEH
Graphics Systems. Ghostscript and GSview are Copyright of Aladdin Enterprises, CA. GNU Ghostscript is Copyright of the Free Software
Foundation, Inc. Linux is Copyright of the Free Software Foundation, Inc. IRAP is Copyright of Roxar Technologies. LSF is a registered
trademark of Platform Computing Corporation, Canada. VISAGE is a registered trademark of VIPS Ltd. Cosmo is a trademark and
PLATINUM technology is a registered trademark of PLATINUM technology, inc. PEBI is a trademark of Veritas DGC Inc./HOT Engineering
GmbH. Stratamodel is a trademark of Landmark Graphics Corporation. GLOBEtrotter, FLEXlm and SAMreport are registered trademarks
of GLOBEtrotter Software, Inc. CrystalEyes is a trademark of StereoGraphics Corporation. Tektronix is a registered trade mark of
Tektronix, Inc. GOCAD and JACTA are trademarks of T-Surf. Myrinet is a trade name of Myricom, Inc. This product may include software
developed by the Apache Software Foundation (http://www.apache.org). Copyright (c) 1999-2001 The Apache Software Foundation. All
rights reserved. MPI/Pro is a registered trademark of MPI Software Technology, Inc. The TGS logo is a trademark of TGS, Inc. POSC, the
POSC logo and Epicentre are registered trademarks of Petrotechnical Open Standards Consortium, Inc. Red Hat is a registered
trademeak of Red Hat, Inc. This product may include software developed using LAPACK (http://www.netlib.org/lapack/), which is copyright
of its authors. Scali is a trademark of Scali Inc.
Table of Contents
List of Figures ..... ...................................................................................................................................................................7
List of Tables ...... ...................................................................................................................................................................8
List of Figures
Figure 5.1 ..........
Figure 5.2 ..........
Figure 5.3 ..........
Figure 5.4 ..........
Figure 5.5 ..........
Figure 5.6 ..........
Figure 5.7 ..........
Figure 5.8 ..........
Figure 5.9 ..........
Figure 5.10 ........
Figure 5.11 ........
Figure 5.12 ........
Figure 6.1 ..........
Figure 6.2 ..........
Figure 6.3 ..........
Figure 6.4 ..........
Figure 6.5 ..........
Figure 6.6 ..........
Figure 6.7 ..........
List of Tables
Table 5.1
Table 5.2
Table 5.3
Table 5.4
Table 5.5
Table 6.1
Table 6.2
Table 6.3
Table 6.4
Table 6.5
Table 6.6
Table 6.7
Table 6.8
Table 6.9
Table 6.10
Table 6.11
Table 6.12
Table 6.13
Table 6.14
Table 6.15
Table 6.16
Table 6.17
Table 7.1
Table 7.2
Table 7.3
Table 7.4
Table 7.5
Table 7.6
Table 7.7
Table 7.8
Table 8.1
Table 8.2
Table 8.3
Table 8.4
Table 8.5
Table 8.6
Table 8.7
Table 8.8
Table 8.9
Table 8.10
Table 8.11
Table 8.12
Table A.1
Table A.2
Table A.3
New developments
Chapter 1
New developments
Developments for 2007.1
10
New developments
Developments for 2005A
Batch Mode
For the 2004A version of PVTi the batch mode has undergone a significant revamp. Over the
last few years the user interface of PVTi has evolved rapidly and the existing batch mode facility
no longer adequately supports more recent functionality. There have been 3 significant
modifications to the PVTi batch mode:
1
The way a batch mode is executed has changed. The new way to launch a batch mode run
on a PC is to use the command $pvti -batch filename where filename is the
name of your PVTi project. See "General information" on page 152 for more details on
running batch mode with other platforms.
New developments
Developments for 2004A
11
The new batch mode now supports the majority of the functionality available in interactive
mode - namely splitting, grouping, regression, experiment simulation and export. Export
for ECLIPSE Thermal, PNA splitting and material balance checks are not currently
supported. For more details on the functionality constraints of the batch mode see
"Constraints on the workflow" on page 154.
It was felt that a more user friendly way of constructing the .PVI files suitable for batch
mode was needed since a batch mode file requires some extra sections than a standard
interactive mode PVI file does. A new option called Write Keywords for Batch Mode is
available on the Options panel. If this is turned on and a workflow is performed in
interactive mode and then the file saved, PVTi ensures that this file is then suitable for use
in a batch mode run. The batch mode run then reproduces the workflow and results that
were obtained in interactive mode. See"Preparing Batch Mode Files in Interactive Mode"
on page 153 for a detailed explanation of this facility.
For an overview of all aspects of the new batch mode facility see "Batch system and keywords"
on page 152.
Panel Addition/Modification
1
There is a new LBC Viscosity Coefficients panel available under the menu option Edit |
Fluid Model | LBC Viscosity Coefficients.... This panel shows, if using the LorentzBray-Clark (LBC) viscosity model, the current values of the five coefficients.
The Thermal Properties panel has been modified to include the new properties introduced
as a result of the new ECLIPSE Thermal export functionality. Specifically, the properties
Heat Cap. A and Heat Cap. B have been changed to Heat Cap. A/G and Heat Cap. B/H.
There is also a new property called Heat of Vaporization which corresponds to the
HEATVAPS keyword exported for ECLIPSE Thermal.
Component Constraints
1
It is now possible to read in projects where fluid samples can have up to 100 components.
However, no functionality involving the EoS flash can be used until a group operation has
been performed in order to reduce the number of components in all samples to <=50.
Two new components are available in the PVTi library - Benzene (C6H6) and Toluene
(C7H8). The short names for use in the fundamentals or components panel are BEN for
Benzene and TOL for Toluene. See "Library" on page 95 to view the components in the
PVTi library. To view the library within PVTi itself use the View | Library option.
EXPIND.
This is a list of integers - one for each experiment defined in the project - which specify whether
an experiment should be used (turned on) or not used (turned off) when performing a
regression.
12
New developments
Developments for 2004A
HEATVAPS.
This keyword is used to store the Heat of Vaporization at the standard temperature for each
component.
Sections
There is a new section called APITRACK. This is used when preparing batch files if the API
Tracking export facility is to be made use of in batch mode. It is essentially the same as the
BLACKOIL section but has an extra keyword called SAMPLES, which records the samples for
which PVT tables will be exported.
Manual
1
The section "The Most Asked Questions About PVTi" on page 15 has been updated with
questions regarding the Batch Mode, ECLIPSE Thermal Export and API Tracking
functionality.
A number of the tutorials have been amended - in particular the tutorial entitled Using the
ECLIPSE Thermal Support Module has been replaced by a tutorial called "Exporting an
ECLIPSE Thermal model" on page 73.
New developments
Developments for 2004A
13
14
New developments
Developments for 2004A
Chapter 2
Introduction
This section has been designed as a reference section so that you can quickly access information
about common problems encountered with PVTi without having to spend time looking through
the manual for the relevant section. The questions in this section have been constructed using
the most common support issues and also the InTouch database. Cross-references are provided
where necessary so that readers can access the appropriate parts of the manual for more detailed
information on a particular topic if required.
The questions are:
"What is the difference between normal regression, special regression and automatic (PVTi
selects) regression?" on page 20
"Can Black Oil tables be extended above the liquid bubble point in PVTi?" on page 22
"Can PVTi be used if you know the composition of a fluid but do not have any
observations? And vice-versa?" on page 22
15
"How Can I Export PVT Tables to use the API Tracking Functionality in ECLIPSE
BlackOil?" on page 25
16
Once the Fundamentals panel has been completed you will see have a sample called ZI on the
tree view on the left-hand side of the main window.This is the fundamental sample for the
project and the name ZI cannot be changed.
Just because a component is defined in the ZI sample it does not mean there has to be
any of it there. It only has to be defined in the ZI sample to be used in other fluid
samples. If the mole fraction of a C8 component in the ZI sample is set to be 0.0 then
the C8 component can then be use in the OIL sample and the mole fractions set as
required.
Once at least one fluid sample (the ZI sample) has been defined then any experiment supported
within PVTi can be simulated as well as operations such as phase plots, fingerprint plots and
splitting.
For more information on creating fluid samples see "Defining Samples" on page 107.
Creating Observations
If there are no observations at all for a particular experiment then to create one you need to select
the Edit | Observations... option and the Observations panel appears.
On the Experiments column on the left-hand side there is a list of all the experiments that are
available within PVTi and * symbols are next to the ones that you currently have defined within
your project.
17
If one of these experiments is selected then in the Experiment List column a list of all the names
of the experiments of that type in your project appears for example, BUBBLE5, DEW3, DL1.
If one of these is selected then all the possible observations available within PVTi for that type
of experiment are displayed in the Observation Type column. Again observation types with a
* next to them means that there are values already defined for this particular experiment in your
project. Simply click on one to see and edit the values. To create a new observation select the
one you want and then click on the + button on the top left of the panel. Values and weights can
then be entered for the observation.
Note
For more information on creating and editing experiments/observations see "Simulation using
PVTi" on page 117 and/or the tutorial "Simulating experiments" on page 43.
50 fluid samples
Note
*When a splitting operation was performed it was possible to have more than 50
components (up to 100 in fact) but the components had to be grouped back so that there
were less than 50 before any experiment simulation could take place.
2003A
These pre-2003A data constraints have been present in PVTi for 4 to 5 years and, in-line with
the huge increase in computing power in the last few years, we have decided to enhance the data
constraint capability of PVTi so that the following is now available:
Note
18
It is now possible to read in, save, split and group with fluids containing up to 100
components. However, the limit is still 50 components for any functionality involving
the EoS flash.
If two of your fluid samples are not relevant to each other for example they come from
different wells/reservoirs then a separate project should be created for each one.
Disabling Experiments/Observations
You can prevent PVTi from including an experiment in the regression by right-clicking on the
experiment and selecting Dont use in Regression. A cross appears on the experiment
indicating it is not currently available within the regression facility.
You can disable an observation so that it is not used within the regression by again right-clicking
and selecting Dont use in Regression. Alternatively, by right-clicking and selecting Set
Weight and then entering zero the observation is also not included in the regression.
19
Note
If an experiment is disabled then, as you would expect, all the observations are
automatically disabled.
Regression Weights
In general there will be a set of values in an observation. For example, if we have a differential
liberation (DL) experiment defined then a viscosity observation would have a value for each
pressure. We have two types of weight: there are single weights for each value of an observation
and global weights that apply to every value in an observation.
By right clicking on an experiment observation the global weight can be set. As mentioned
above, by setting this to zero none of the values in the observation would be used. Alternatively,
you may want to set a global weight for an experimental observation particularly high, for
example, matching the bubble point of a fluid is normally very important if one wants to ensure
that it is a single-phase liquid at the temperature and pressure of the reservoir.
Or maybe you do not trust the accuracy of a particular observation value, for example an oil
formation volume factor (FVF) value in a DL experiment.You may then not want to use a global
weight as all the other observation values look ok. In this case setting a single-value weight to
a very low value helps you match all the other values in the observation during regression as the
rogue, inaccurate value no longer inhibits convergence.
Both the single-value and global weights for an experimental observation can be set in the
Observations panel by selecting the Edit | Observations... option, highlighting the
appropriate observation and then simply typing in your chosen weights.
For a good example of how to use the regression facility, see the tutorial "Fitting an equation of
state to experimental results" on page 50.
20
The automatic regression facility or PVTi Selects as it is called on the Regression panel
attempts to choose the best normal variables to regress on for you before actually doing the
regression and reporting the answer. It should be noted that there is no substitute for a good
engineer in the sense that one should not just use this automatic facility all the time in the belief
that PVTi will do all the work. For example, the automatic facility will not use special variables
to regress on and so it is up to you to decide whether this would be necessary or not.
However the automatic facility can still be a useful tool in obtaining a good match to PVT data.
The way the algorithm chooses the regression parameters is essentially based on 2 criterion. No
parameters are allowed to have more than a 90% correlation on any other parameter. Secondly,
no parameter is allowed to have less than 1% of the sensitivity of the most sensitive parameter
For a detailed discussion of the automatic regression algorithm see "A consistent methodology
that can be applied automatically" on page 389.
For more general information on the regression facility see "Regression in PVTi" on page 126.
Pc, Tc and of any component with mole weight of C7 or heavier (as these are effectively
mixtures of different molecule types and so may differ from library values).
A and B of any component with mole weight C7 or heavier. Again because these are
mixtures.
The variables mentioned above are all normal regression variables. The following set of special
regression variables can also often prove useful to get a match between samples:
The mole weight of a plus fraction (if no split on the plus fraction has been performed).
For a detailed explanation of why some of the above are good and bad choices for regression
parameters, see "Regression in PVT analysis" on page 386. There are also more specific
guidelines for choosing regression parameters depending on whether one is dealing with an oil
reservoir, see "Recommended PVT analysis for oil reservoirs" on page 372 - or a gascondensate reservoir, see "Recommended PVT analysis for gas condensate reservoirs" on
page 377.
Finally, for a tutorial illustrating the use of the normal and special regression facilities in a
typical workflow see the new "Workflow Tutorial" on page 61.
21
22
In fact, in PVT laboratories engineers tend to use the default fluid model (one that has not been
regressed on) for a given equation of state in PVTi to give them a ball-park answer for their
particular experimental observation. This can give them some idea as to how to set their
experiment up as they now have information on the kind of answers they might expect to
measure.
If you have black oil tables exported from before and including 2001A_2 PVTi, or you
have no black oil tables at all then, unfortunately, PVTi will not be able to construct the
compositional model for you. !
23
In order to try to generate one of the asphaltene curves a PNA split must first be performed on
the heaviest component/pseudo component. To do this select Edit | Fluid Model | Split | PNA
Distribution..., which does this split for you using correlations from within PVTi.
Now, to create the curve an asphaltene appearance/disappearance experiment must be
performed. This can be done using the instructions in this section on "How do I create an
experiment along with a series of observations?" on page 17. In the experiment entry panel tick
the appropriate box depending on whether you want the asphaltene disappearance/appearance
curve and enter the temperature values where you want the curve generated.
Caution
Make sure there is at least one observation defined for this experiment and then right click on
the experiment and select plot. You can super-impose your curve onto a standard phase plot by
using the super-impose button on the toolbar.
Hint
There is a shortcut for doing standard phase plots. This is accessed by clicking and
holding the left mouse button down on the appropriate fluid sample icon and then
dragging the cursor into the plot viewer.
There is a more detailed section on the theory behind how PVTi models the presence of wax and
asphaltene phases in "Wax and asphaltene precipitation in PVTi" on page 394.
24
For more detailed information on the new thermal module see "ECLIPSE Thermal Export
Module" on page 401. For workflow information and a summary of the exported keywords see
"Compositional Data for ECLIPSE Thermal" on page 367.
Open the project file in interactive mode which you wish to use.
Save the file using the File | Save (concise)... menu option.
Load this new concise file back into PVTi and open the Set PVTi Program Options
panel by doing Utilities | Program | Options.... Set the last option Write Keywords for
Batch Mode to Yes.
Now perform the required workflow in interactive mode that you wish the batch mode to
reproduce e.g. simulation of experiment, splitting, grouping, export, etc.
When you have performed the workflow save the file using File | Save...
For a comprehensive review of the new batch mode functionality see "Batch system and
keywords" on page 152.
Use the File | Export Keywords | API Tracking option in ECLIPSE BlackOil... menu
option to open the Export Panel for API Tracking.
Select the samples you wish to use in the export and move them to the Use box.
Choose the keywords you wish to export. Normally the Live Oil (PVTO) and Dead Gas
(PVDG) keywords are used with the API Tracking option.
Select whether you wish to export a gas table for each sample or just a single gas table.
Select whether you wish to write to tables using full double precision numbers.
25
PVTi should then write the tables to a file and show them in the output display. This file is then
suitable to use as the PVT input for an API Tracking run in ECLIPSE BlackOil. For a similar
description of the API Tracking workflow see "Export for API Tracking option in ECLIPSE
BlackOil" on page 134. For a technical description of the API Tracking model in ECLIPSE as
well as an explanation of how PVTi calculates suitable PVT tables see "Model for API Tracking
option in ECLIPSE BlackOil" on page 364.
26
Introduction
Chapter 3
General information
The PVTi program is an Equation of State based package for generating PVT data from the
laboratory analysis of oil and gas samples. The program may be used through an interactive
menu system or run in a batch mode. An interactive session can be saved as a batch input file,
which contains commands to reproduce the interactive operations. Alternatively, a batch input
file can be run from an interactive session.
Fluid definition
Multiple fluid samples can be defined by specifying components as one of three types. Library
components require only that the appropriate component mnemonic be entered. Characterized
components define properties of plus fractions from a limited set of information. Finally all the
properties of a component can be defined, a facility which can be used selectively to edit the
properties of existing components.
Introduction
General information
27
It is possible to group the components to reduce or pseudoise the fluid system (make a fluid
definition of the system using pseudo components), or to split the plus fraction into more
components, preserving molecular weight and mole fraction. Multiple samples having different
plus fraction properties, say mole weight and specific gravity, can be characterized by splitting
the plus fraction into two or more pseudo-components of fixed properties but variable
composition.
Fingerprint plots of mole fraction against molecular weight, or phase diagrams, are available.
Simulation of experiments
Experiments may be performed on the fluid systems defined using the equation of state model.
Possibilities are:
saturation pressures
flash calculations
differential liberations
swelling tests
28
vaporization test
multiphase flash
critical point
saturation temperature
Introduction
General information
Almost any result from the experiments mentioned can be used as an observation
against which to regress.
Introduction
General information
29
30
Introduction
General information
Getting started
Chapter 4
Starting PVTi
Windows platforms
ECLIPSE Program Launcher
1
Command line
1
UNIX platforms
1
Getting started
Starting PVTi
31
Tutorials
Chapter 5
Overview
The tutorials provide a step-by-step introduction to the functionality of PVTi.
Note
These tutorials are not intended to teach PVT analysis, but instead concentrate on
illustrating typical work-flows for PVTi.
Each tutorial is divided into a number of distinct sections intended to highlight a specific aspect
of the analysis process. To avoid repetition, later tutorials assume familiarity with some used in
the first tutorials, so it is strongly recommended that you work through them in the order they
are presented.
Available tutorials
The following tutorials are available:
Tutorials
Overview
32
Tutorials
Overview
33
"Introduction" on page 34
"Discussion" on page 36
Introduction
Fluid properties estimation can provide quick-look PVT tables at the well site.
A saturation pressure (bubble or dew-point) together with a reservoir composition are sufficient
inputs to provide a quick-look simulation, giving an initial estimation of fluid properties in
advance of a full fluid analysis in the lab.
After completing this tutorial you should be able to use PVTi as a simulation tool for fluid
properties estimation.
Start PVTi (if you are unsure about this see "Starting PVTi" on page 31).
Hint
When a new, empty project is created in PVTi, the Fundamentals panel opens
automatically. To re-enter this panel at any later time, select PVTi: Edit |
Fundamentals...
The Fundamentals panel allows you to enter the minimum information required to create
a complete equation of state model.
3
Hint
34
The mole fractions that you see in lab reports are derived from weight fractions and the
mole weights of the components. It is weight fractions that are actually measured.
PVTi allows a choice of either form in the Fundamentals panel.
Tutorials
Fluid Properties Estimation
In the Text Import Wizard switch on Ignore Records and set the number of records
to ignore to 2 (since we want to ignore the column headings).
Weight Frac.
(percent)
(percent)
0.05
C1
6.25
C2
3.10
C3
3.27
IC4
0.89
NC4
2.44
IC5
1.11
NC5
1.09
C6
3.88
C7+
77.49
Spec Gravity
0.43
N2
Hint
Mol Weight
218
Only enter mole weights for components whose properties will be characterized, the
other components come from the library. Also, specific gravity is an optional
additional parameter that can be used in the characterization, if it is not specified it is
calculated using a correlation.
Click Apply
PVTi adds the mole fractions and the specific gravity of the plus fraction.
b
Hint
Tutorials
Fluid Properties Estimation
35
Hint
This is the maximum pressure in the depletion experiments that are created.
Set the Project Units to Field, this sets the units that are used on the plots.
Click OK.
This is all the information required to fit the equation of state and to generate the Constant
Composition Expansion (CCE), depletion experiment (either differential liberation or constant
volume depletion) and the optimized separator. After fitting the equation-of-state and creating
the experiments, default plots from the depletion experiments are drawn along with the phase
curve for the fitted fluid.
The methods used in Fluid Properties Estimation are explained in "Fluid Properties Estimation"
on page 384.
9
Hint
By clicking on one of the experiments in the sample tree with the right mouse button,
and selecting Report..., you can view the reports for individual experiments
separately.
Flash calculations
1
Enter a temperature of 60 F
Click OK.
Right-click on the newly created Flash simulation (FLASH1) and select Report to see the
results of flashing the reservoir fluid to standard conditions.
This allows you to attempt any Flash calculation on the reservoir fluid.
Hint
The Properties Estimation panel can also be used to create additional separators,
saturation pressure or depletion experiments, for example at other temperatures.
Discussion
Fluid Properties Estimation is a useful tool, particularly in situations where full lab analysis of
the fluid is not available for a complete equation-of-state matching project.
For full details of the operations performed during fluid property estimation see "Fluid
Properties Estimation" on page 384.
During fluid properties estimation, the project created is a complete PVTi project. This means
that a more experienced user has access to the rich range of features within the product. At the
same time, the less experienced user can use PVTi for Fluid Properties Estimation without
requiring in-depth knowledge of equation-of-state methods or PVT analysis.
36
Tutorials
Fluid Properties Estimation
"Introduction" on page 37
"Discussion" on page 42
Introduction
The PVT report for this fluid contains details of three experiments: a Constant Composition
Expansion experiment, a Differential Liberation experiment, and a Bubble Point experiment.
The later tutorials describe how the experimental results may be used to fit an equation of state
to the experimental behavior, and how this fitted equation of state can be used to generate PVT
tables for use in reservoir simulations.
This tutorial shows how to set up basic fluid properties in PVTi and how to display the phase
envelope for the defined fluid.
Defining a fluid
PVT analysis involves fitting an Equation of State to experimental data and then using this
Equation of State to produce PVT tables for use in reservoir simulations. The first step is to start
up PVTi, and import the component and fluid definitions.
Table 5.2 shows the component and fluid definitions that are used in this tutorial.
Table 5.2
Component
% Mole Fraction
CO2
0.91
N2
0.16
C1
36.47
Mole Weight
Specific Gravity
Tutorials
Creating a fluid system
37
Table 5.2
Component
% Mole Fraction
C2
9.67
C3
6.95
IC4
1.44
NC4
3.93
IC5
1.44
NC5
1.41
C6
4.33
C7+
33.29
Mole Weight
Specific Gravity
218.0
0.8515
Start PVTi (if you are unsure about this see "Starting PVTi" on page 31).
Note
This has defined BLACK as the prefix for any files that are written by PVTi.
The Fundamentals panel opens so that basic project information can be entered.
38
Click Apply.
Enter the mole fractions from Table 5.2 and the details for the C7+ component into the
Fundamentals panel and click OK.
Note
The components for which no mole weight or specific gravity has been specified are
automatically set to use the PVTi component properties library (see "Component
types" on page 102.)
Hint
The component properties can be examined by selecting PVTi: Edit | Fluid Model |
Components.... This panel can also be used to add additional components, the select
alternative characterization methods and to manually defined component properties.
Hint
Only one sample, ZI, is defined in the Fundamentals panel. Additional samples can
be created using PVTi: Edit | Samples | Names... and mole fractions can be entered
using PVTi: Edit | Samples | Compositions...
Tutorials
Creating a fluid system
Click on OK.
Program options
1
Set the Separator GOR calculation to use Liquid at Stock Tank Conditions.
The Program Options panel should now contain the following data:
Table 5.3
Field
Data
Sliq=Vliq/Vsat
Dependent
Polynomial correlations
User units
Calculated compositions
No Save to samples
Component Library
Katz-Firoozabadi
Experimental Compositions
Output to Screen/PVP
Experimental Results
Plot Vectors
No Output to file
A4 format
Normal
All Data
Flash Calculations
E300 Flash
Keep Fixed
Tutorials
Creating a fluid system
39
Right-click on ZI in the project tree-view and select Fingerprint Plot from the pop-up
menu.
40
Click on OK.
The plot should look like Figure 5.2.
Tutorials
Creating a fluid system
Note
A default phase plot with a single quality line can be generated by dragging ZI from
the tree-view of the project (in the left pane of the main window), and dropping it on
to the main plot workspace.
Hint
The complete project can be saved using PVTi: File | Save... This, effectively, saves
a history of the project. The original fluid description is saved, along with SPLIT or
GROUP sections for split and group operations you perform. By choosing to save
current modifications, the system is saved in its current state, after all splits, groups,
etc., have been performed. For work in progress it is usually better to use Save so that
past steps can be recovered. For a final fluid model, the Save (Concise) option allows
a complete description of the final model to be saved, without the steps taken to get
there.
This file can now be read in using the PVTi: File | Import | SYSTEM... option.
Tutorials
Creating a fluid system
41
Discussion
In this tutorial a fluid was defined from data and an Equation of State was selected to describe
that fluid. This fluid definition provides the basic building blocks for further PVT analysis. The
fluid definition can be used in simulation studies to compare it with experimental results from
the reservoir fluid; see "Simulating experiments" on page 43. This definition can then be
adjusted so that it describes the experimental results; see "Fitting an equation of state to
experimental results" on page 50. The fitted fluid definition is finally used to generate PVT
tables for ECLIPSE ; see "Exporting ECLIPSE Black Oil PVT tables" on page 54, ECLIPSE
pseudo-compositional, VFPi and ECLIPSE Compositional.
42
Tutorials
Creating a fluid system
Simulating experiments
This tutorial illustrates how experiments are simulated in PVTi. It covers the basic functionality
of PVTi. Knowledge of this tutorial is assumed in later tutorials, so you are advised to work
through them in order. The data for this project are provided in the standard installation of PVTi
in the directory:
$ECL/2007.1/pvti/tutorials
and should be copied to the local directory before starting the tutorial.
The tutorial is split into several sections:
"Introduction" on page 43
Introduction
This tutorial describes how experimental observations can be entered into PVTi and how the
experiments can then be simulated from an existing fluid definition.
1
Start PVTi (if you are unsure about this see "Starting PVTi" on page 31).
File | Open...
Open the file FLUID_DEF.PVI that was created in the last tutorial. (Alternatively open
the supplied tutorial file FLUID_CORRECT.PVI).
Setting units
1
Utilities | Units...
Click on OK.
Tutorials
Simulating experiments
43
44
Pressure
Relative Volume
(PSIG)
(V(p)/V(pb)
5000.0
0.9453
4500.0
0.9541
4000.0
0.9638
3500.0
0.9746
3000.0
0.9867
2900.0
0.9893
2800.0
0.9920
2700.0
0.9948
2620
0.9970
2605
0.9974
2591
0.9978
2516.7*
1.0000
2401
1.0243
2253
1.0599
2090
1.1066
1897
1.1750
1698
1.2655
1477
1.4006
1292
1.5557
1040
1.8696
830
2.2956
640
2.9457
472
3.9877
Tutorials
Simulating experiments
Hint
The Experiment Entry window now shows three folders: General, Observations and
Components. These folders are used to define the experiment entry form.
3
Click in the top left cell of the table and select Pressure from the drop-down list in that
cell.
In the second column select Relative Vol. from the drop-down list.
Hint
By making the column headings the same as those in Table 5.4, the task of data entry
is simplified. The ability to tailor the table means that data entry can then be further
accelerated by importing observations from a text file or the clipboard.
Click on Next.
The table now shows two folders. The Components folder has disappeared as there were
no component observations selected; the General folder now shows an entry field to select
fluid type and another to enter the temperature of the experiment.
In the General folder, enter the temperature from Table 5.4 (220 F).
The error message Cannot delete rows from this table appears This
is because the table has a fixed length and the file we are importing from has fewer
rows than the table. This message can be safely ignored.
13 Click on OK to remove the message Cannot delete rows from this table.
The table now contains the same information as Table 5.4. As the experiment information
is complete, the experiment can be created.
14 Click on Next to create the experiment.
Tutorials
Simulating experiments
45
Hint
The data tree now shows the created experiment (CCE1). The asterisk (*) next to the
experiments name means that it is active. CCE1 has one observation node, for the
relative volume measurements.
Click on the Relative Vol. observation in the Data Tree and drop it over the Main Plot
Window.
The Main Plot Window should now look like Figure 5.3.
46
Tutorials
Simulating experiments
Pressure
(PSIG)
Oil
Volume
Factor
Gas
Solution
Deviation
GOR
Factor
(Mscf/stb)
Z
Reservoir
Oil
Density
(lb/ft3)
2516.7*
1.7493
1.1342
45.110
2350
1.7095
1.0526
0.8686
45.6688
0.7553
1.2574
2100
1.6535
0.9378
0.8692
46.5022
0.7547
1.4070
1850
1.6013
0.8309
0.8719
47.3311
0.7565
1.6006
1600
1.5523
0.7307
0.8767
48.1595
0.7614
1.8586
1350
1.5057
0.6361
0.8836
48.9920
0.7704
2.2164
1100
1.4609
0.5460
0.8926
49.835
0.7859
2.7411
850
1.4171
0.4591
0.9036
50.6992
0.8121
3.5773
600
1.3726
0.3732
0.9167
51.6076
0.8597
5.1050
350
1.3234
0.2824
0.9324
52.6319
0.9618
8.7518
159
1.2720
0.1960
0.9481
53.6731
1.1726
18.6846
1.1228
0.0
56.3229
1.8901
In the Observations folder, set the table headings to match those in Table 5.5: Pressure,
Oil Rel. Vol., Gas-Oil ratio, Vapor Z-factor, Liquid Density, Gas Gravity, Gas FVF.
Click on Next
Import the file DL_TABLE.TXT into the table in the Observations folder, remembering
to ignore the first line, which contains column headings.
The Experiment Entry panel now shows that there are 2 experiments defined.
In the Observations folder set the first column heading to Sat. Pressure and the second
to Liquid Density
Click on Next
Tutorials
Simulating experiments
47
Enter the saturation pressure as 2516.7 psig and the liquid density as 45.11 lb/ft3.
Click Close.
A Differential Liberation experiment with observations of: relative oil volume, solution
gas-oil ratio, Z-factors, oil density, gas gravity and gas formation volume factor.
A Bubble Point experiment at 220o F with observations of bubble point pressure and liquid
density.
Hint
The information about which experiments have been defined, and for which
observations have been entered for those experiments, is contained in the Data Tree.
Click OK.
This plots each observed data set (as points) for the differential liberation experiment and
each calculated data set (as lines) generated by simulation.
Hint
4
Examine each of the plots and note how well (or badly) the simulation has matched the
data.
Hint
48
Double-clicking on one of the small plots swaps it with the large plot.
You can right-click on an axis and select Show Edit Box from the drop-down menu.
This opens the Axis Property Editing panel. In this panel you can customize the axes,
for example by changing the units used in plotting.
Tutorials
Simulating experiments
In the next section, the match between calculated and observed data values are improved by
regression.
Discussion
In this tutorial an existing project was extended to include experiments. Constant Composition
Expansion, Bubble Point and Differential Liberation experiments were imported and simulated
for the defined fluid. The match between the experimental observations and the simulated
results was examined using the plotting facilities in PVTi. The fluid model can then be adjusted
so that it provides the best fit (in a least-squares sense) to the experimental observations (see
"Fitting an equation of state to experimental results" on page 50). The fitted fluid definition is
finally used to generate PVT tables for ECLIPSE (see "Exporting ECLIPSE Black Oil PVT
tables" on page 54).
Tutorials
Simulating experiments
49
"Introduction" on page 50
"Discussion" on page 53
Introduction
This tutorial illustrates the fitting of the fluid definition to the experimental observations.
The fluid definition and experiments are read in from an existing PVI file and the regression
facilities in PVTi are used to generate an improved fit between the two.
Start PVTi (if you are unsure about this see "Starting PVTi" on page 31).
File | Open...
Open the file SIMULATE_SECTION.PVI created in the last tutorial. (Alternatively you
can use the file SIMULATE_CORRECT.PVI.)
Hint
50
Examine the fluid component data in "Component and fluid definitions" on page 37.
Tutorials
Fitting an equation of state to experimental results
Note
The idea here is to look for consecutive components that have small mole fractions.
These can be grouped together and treated as a single regression variable, forcing the
solution to be physically realistic.
Hint
The properties of C1 and C2 are well known and generally do not differ significantly
from the library properties.
Grouping the C3, IC4, NC4, IC5, NC5 and C6 components into a single regression variable
preserves monotonicity between the components, in addition to creating a variable that accounts
for 19.5% of the total composition.
Hint
The plus fraction (C7+) contains a mixture of components C7+ and higher, so its
properties may not be so well-determined. This makes the plus fraction an ideal
candidate for regression to fit the equation of state to the experimental results.
Sensitivity analysis
Sensitivity analysis is used to establish which fluid properties most affect the difference
between the observed and simulated values. The sensitivities are calculated for critical
temperature and pressure for each experiment, for both regression variables. Finally the most
sensitive properties will be selected for use in the regression.
Hint
Select Normal as the Type of regression variables in the Variables section of the panel.
Click Variables.
The regression variables are numbered for each property. Entering 1 in the critical pressure
(Pcrit) column in the rows corresponding to C3, IC4, NC4, IC5, NC5 and C6 groups those
components into the first regression variable.
Fill in the table in the Select EOS parameters for regression panel with the following
data:
Mnem
Pcrit
Tcrit
C3
IC4
NC4
IC5
NC5
C6
C7+
Tutorials
Fitting an equation of state to experimental results
51
Leave the second part of the Select EOS parameters for regression panel blank.
Click on OK.
Hint
The second part of the Select EOS parameters for regression panel relates to
binary interaction coefficients.
From an examination of the information in the Regression Report panel, it can be seen
that the first Pcrit parameter is not likely to aid the regression, and it may hinder it.
Consequently that regression variable is removed before regression is started.
8
10 In the Select EOS parameters for regression panel click on Reset to clear all the cells
in the table.
11 Fill in the columns to describe the reduced set of regression variables with the following
data:
Mnem
Pcrit
Tcrit
C3
IC4
NC4
IC5
NC5
C6
C7+
12 Click on OK.
52
Tutorials
Fitting an equation of state to experimental results
Right-click on experiment DL1 in the project tree-view and select Plot from the pop-up
menu.
Hint
The results of regression are the fluid definition (that is the SYSTEM section) of the newly
created PVI file. They can now be read in using the PVTi: File | Import PVI Section |
SYSTEM... option.
Discussion
In this tutorial a fluid definition, an Equation of State and some experiments along with their
observations were imported from an existing PVI file (the file created in "Simulating
experiments" on page 43). The definition was adjusted so that it provided the best fit (in a leastsquares sense) to the experimental observations ("Fitting an equation of state to experimental
results" on page 50). This fitted fluid definition can now be used to generate PVT tables for
ECLIPSE (see "Exporting ECLIPSE Black Oil PVT tables" on page 54).
Tutorials
Fitting an equation of state to experimental results
53
"Introduction" on page 54
"Discussion" on page 57
Introduction
Once the fluid description has been fitted to the experimental observations, it may be used in a
reservoir simulation. PVTi facilitates the transition between a fluid description and the PVT
keyword description required by the ECLIPSE family of simulators.
In this tutorial PVT tables are created for the fluid definition developed in the tutorials 2, 3 and
4. The output tables are then used in an ECLIPSE simulation.
1
Start PVTi (if you are unsure about this see "Starting PVTi" on page 31).
Enter a reservoir temperature of 220 F and an initial reservoir pressure of 2500 psig.
Click on OK
54
Tutorials
Exporting ECLIPSE Black Oil PVT tables
Right-click on experiment DL1 in the sample tree and select Export Keywords... from the
drop-down menu
Hint
PVTi: File | Export Keywords | Oil reservoir... produces an export panel for all
available Differential Liberation experiments.
Select PVTO and PVDG (Live oil and dry gas) on the radio button menu.
The Separators drop-down menu becomes active. This is because the produced fluid from
the Differential Liberation experiment must be passed through a surface separator to
calculate, for example, surface gas-oil ratios. The default is a separator at Standard
Conditions. If any separator experiments were defined for this sample, they would also
appear here.
Click OK
In the File Selection box, enter ECLIPSE100 as the name of the export file.
The keywords are generated and the Display Output module shows the generated keywords.
Note
The comments prefixed with --PVTi that appear before each keyword are the concise
version of the current PVTi project. This is the minimum information PVTi requires to
create the tables. This information can be used to rapidly convert an ECLIPSE
BlackOil data-set to an ECLIPSE Compositional data-set.
Caution
Note
Avoid editing the --PVTi prefixed comments. Any changes may invalidate the
file, preventing PVTi from reading it.
The sample SWELLSAM has been added to the sample tree. This sample is the swelled
sample that was obtained by swelling the original sample with vapor that was split off
just below the bubble-point of the fluid. PVTi automatically swells the sample with the
vapor from the bubble-point so that the table can be extended to values above the
original bubble point.
The information in the keywords is also shown in the main plot space, keyword PVTO is shown
in Figure 5.4.
Tutorials
Exporting ECLIPSE Black Oil PVT tables
55
Figure 5.4 Plot of Oil FVF, Viscosity and Rs versus pressure for the output black oil property tables
Click Next
In the General panel enter the reference properties for the sample:
a
In the Observations panel enter the depths 9000 ft. and 9400 ft.
Click Next
Click OK to allow PVTi to add extra points between the maximum and minimum depths.
Click Close
Right-click on the new experiment (COMPG1) in the sample tree and select Export
keywords... from the drop-down menu.
10 Select the RSVD/RVVD (black oil) on the Equilibration Keyword radio button.
56
Tutorials
Exporting ECLIPSE Black Oil PVT tables
11 Click OK.
12 Enter the filename RSVD.PVO for the exported keyword.
Note
In this case, only RSVD is generated. This is because the reservoir is all initially in the
liquid phase. If there were a gas-oil contact, both RSVD and RVVD would have been
generated. If the reservoir were all in the gas phase, only RVVD would be generated.
Start ECLIPSE Office with a new case (call it PVTI_TUTORIAL.OFF) and import the
standard data set ECLIPSE100.DATA
Click ECLIPSE to let ECLIPSE Office know what type of data-set is being imported.
PVT Section: File | Import | Append..., and import the PVT table keyword file
(ECLIPSE100.PVO). Click OK to remove the warning message.
PVT Section: File | Import | Append..., and import the water keyword file (PVTW.PVO).
Click OK to remove the warning message
Note
At this stage you may want to view the keywords or plot them. For details on how to
do this, refer the "ECLIPSE Office User Guide".
Close the PVT Section, saving the file with the new keywords.
Initialisation Section: File | Import | Append..., and import the equilibration keyword file
(RSVD.PVO). Click OK to remove the warning message.
10 In the Equilibration Data Specification keyword, set the Rs/Pb v Depth Table to 1, so
that the imported RSVD keyword is used.
11 Close the Initialisation Section, saving the file with the new keywords.
12 Run the simulation.
Discussion
In this tutorial an existing fluid definition was imported into PVTi and exported as PVT tables
that were used in an ECLIPSE Black Oil reservoir simulation. The basic requirements are that
PVTi must simulate a Constant Volume Depletion or Differential Liberation experiment and a
Separator experiment to allow the generation of black oil tables from the fluid definition.
Tutorials
Exporting ECLIPSE Black Oil PVT tables
57
Note
The data for this project are provided with the standard installation of PVTi under the directory:
$ECL/2007.1/pvti/tutorials
and should be copied to the local directory before starting the tutorial.
Note
You should choose a short name for your directory and the name must not contain
spaces. You can use underscore characters. ECLIPSE does not recognize directory
names that are long or that contain spaces.
Introduction
In this tutorial, the black oil PVT tables (PVTO and PVDG) and the Equilibration table (RSVD)
are converted into a full compositional model and composition versus depth table (ZMFVD).
This allows the ECLIPSE data-set from the previous tutorials to be run as a full compositional
case.
Caution
58
The --PVTi comments written out with the keywords are used by PVTi to
reconstruct the original fluid model. Without these there is not enough information
to convert blackoil projects to compositional models. It is important that the lines
prefixed by --PVTi in the ECLIPSE data-set are not edited or moved around
in the file.
Start ECLIPSE Office with the project created in "Exporting ECLIPSE Black Oil PVT
tables" on page 54 or create a new project and load in the data-set
ECLIPSE100_FULL.DATA.
Tutorials
Converting a black oil run to compositional
Click Run.
Note
The launch button has a default selection of launching PVTi with the PVT section of
the current case. PVTi reads this PVT section, creating a PVI file from the --PVTi
comments.
Hint
Click OK.
PVTi: File | Exit (There is no need to save the PVI file as it can be created from the
ECLIPSE Office case).
Click Run.
Hint
Again, PVTi searches for the --PVTi comments and uses them to construct a PVI
project file.
In the COMPG1 export panel, select ZMFVD (Compositional) on the radio button.
Click OK.
Tutorials
Converting a black oil run to compositional
59
PVTi: File | Exit (there is no need to save the PVI file as it can be created from the
ECLIPSE Office case).
In the Case Definition module, select Compositional on the Simulator radio button.
Click OK to the warning about changing between black oil and compositional cases.
In the PVT folder set the number of components to 11, and click OK.
10 PVT Section: File | Import | Append... and import the file FLUID.PVO.
11 PVT Section: File | Import | Append... and import the file ZMFVD.PVO.
12 PVT Section: Section | Keywords...
13 Delete the PVTO and PVDG keywords.
14 PVT Keywords: File | Close...
15 PVT Section: File | Close... and save the section with a new name.
16 In the Data Manager select the Initialisation section.
a
In the EQUIL keyword set the Compositional init type to 1 (so that ZMFVD is used
for equilibration).
17 Initialisation Section: File | Close and save the section with a new name.
18 Run the simulation from the ECLIPSE Office Run Manager.
Discussion
In this tutorial, an ECLIPSE BlackOil simulation data-set was converted to ECLIPSE
Compositional using the integration of PVTi and ECLIPSE Office.
The insertion of the --PVTi comments into the keyword export from PVTi is a powerful tool,
not just for converting data-sets, but also for developing projects in either black oil or
compositional models.
60
Tutorials
Converting a black oil run to compositional
Workflow Tutorial
Introduction
This tutorial illustrates a typical workflow for an oil or gas condensate. It involves splitting the
C7+ fraction into 2 pseudocomponents, special regression, normal regressing, grouping
components, and matching viscosity data.
We have an oil PVT case, with two fluid samples ZI and W2 (Well 2). There is a C7+
characterization with CO2 present. Well 2 has C7+ has a different MW and Specific Gravity,
but the C7+ has been characterized with the ZI fraction only at this point. They are going to
inject CO2 into this field, so there is a Swelling Test with CO2.
The files for this tutorial are provided in the default PVTi installation in the following directory:
$ECL/2007.1/pvti/tutorials
and should be copied to the local directory before starting the tutorial.
This tutorial contains the following sections:
"Special regression to adjust the tail in the splitting calculation" on page 63.
Start PVTi.
Open WORKFLOW.PVI.
Review the calculated and observed Bubble Point Pressures for fluid ZI and W2 in the
Output Display, that is the first and last experiments.
After reviewing the plots clear the plots by clicking the Remove Plots button.
Review all the experiments by observing the plots noting how well PVTi has done in each
case in matching the observations.
Tutorials
Workflow Tutorial
61
Select range.
Click OK.
Enter the following Specific Gravity and Molecular Weight of Samples Plus Fraction
for W2:
Molecular Weight
199
Specific Gravity
0.8338
Click OK.
The C7+ has been split.
10 This time change the Mole Weight of Heaviest Pseudo Component to 300.
This gives us a larger mole fraction for FRC2.
11 Click OK.
12 Check the Samples.
The FRC2 mole fractions are 8.1% and 13.9%
62
Tutorials
Workflow Tutorial
Regressing on the viscosity coefficients after the phase behavior of the fluid has been
matched is always strongly recommended.
We will also increase the weights of the Bubble Point Pressure (Sat. pressure) Observation as
this is a very important criterion to match.
1
Note
In the Regression panel click Simulation and observe the match of the 2 Bubble Point
pressure.
a
10 Under Details check the matches of the observations, especially the 2 bubble point
pressures, both should match very well. Look at the Modifiers to see the amount of change
in the parameters.
Note
You may also view the Sensitivities and the Hessian, Covariance and Correlation
matrices in the Report panel. These matrices are explained in the "Reference section"
on page 89.
63
Right-click on each experiment CCE1, etc. click plot, view the match and then click
Remove Plots before proceeding to the next experiment.
Note the DL results are much improved.
The general rule is if this special regression improves the match of the phase behavior you
should accept the regression. If it does not improve it or makes it worse reject the regression. In
this case the match is improved so we will accept this regression.
3
Set weights on bubble point pressures, etc. Right click on Observation | Set Weight and:
a
Make sure the 2 bubble point pressure observations weights are still 40.
Now refer to the section ""Normal Regression to fine tune match" on page 65 to fine tune
the match.
Note
Do not attempt to get a perfect match since the grouping process described below
changes the match. The key here is to get the Swelling Test; Saturation Pressures to
match better before grouping.
64
Keep the two heavy pseudocomponents that you created by splitting (and did a special
regression on) as separate components.
Tutorials
Workflow Tutorial
Before we group create a Phase diagram of component ZI and click the Superimpose
button.
C1
C2
C3
IC4
NC4
IC5
NC5
C6
FRC1
FRC2
Click Update.
Check the component (Group) names. You change them if you do not like a particular
name.
Click the Edit sample compositions button to view the mole fractions of the new group.
The usual rule is if one of the group mole fractions is significantly smaller than the others
group it into one of its neighbor groups.
10 Plot the experiments to see how much the grouping has changed the calculated results.
11 If the match looks reasonable save this characterization with a new file name.
12 If the match has changed substantially, close this project without saving and read in the
.PVI file from the save at the end of the previous section.
13 Re-group with a different selection of groups or number of pseudocomponents.
Pick various combinations of parameters to regress on, try it, look at the results, reject the
regression and try a different combination
Tutorials
Workflow Tutorial
65
Volume shift parameters may be dependent on Tc and Pc - so you cannot regress on them
separately. They may be independent in which case you can regress on them. If you are
having trouble matching liquid densities try making the volume shifts independent.
A review of the match of the observations shows that the Saturation Pressure for the Swelling
Experiment with CO2 contains the largest difference between the calculated and observed. We
will increase the weight for these results.
There are two ways to change the weight for experiments and observations:
1
then click on the large G in the upper left corner of the panel.
Individual weights appear on the right most columns.
66
Tutorials
Workflow Tutorial
or:
or:
Tc - C9+, C23+
Pc - C9+, C23+
Try as many combinations as required to match the data to within the degree of accuracy
you think is needed. Remember the accuracy of most PVT observations is 5% to 10% or
about 20 Psi.
Once you have finished matching the phase behavior data, accept the results of the
regression and save the file.
To remove an experiment from regression right click on the experiment and select Don't
use in regression. Do this for all experiments except CCE.
In the CCE experiment for all the observations (except for the Vapor visc. and Liquid
visc.) right click on the observation and select set weight.
a
For the Vapor visc. and Liquid visc. change the weight (using the same sequence) from 0
to 1.
Tutorials
Workflow Tutorial
67
First iteration
1
In the Select EOS parameters for regression panel enter 1 in all the boxes under the
heading VcritV.
Click OK.
Plot the Liquid and Vapor viscosity and compare the new match with the observations.
Second iteration
1
In the Regression panel press Reject to return the characterization back to the preregression values.
In the Select EOS parameters for regression panel enter 1 in the first box, 2 in the
second box, 3 through 11 in the remainder of boxes under the heading VcritV.
Click OK.
Plot the Liquid and Vapor viscosity and compare the new match with the observations.
Note this new match is better than the first match.
The phase matching process is now complete. You are ready to export the PVT properties or
characterization for ECLIPSE simulations.
Discussion
This tutorial illustrated a typical workflow for an oil or gas condensate. It involved splitting the
C7+ fraction into 2 pseudocomponents, special regression, normal regressing, grouping
components, and matching viscosity data.
68
Tutorials
Workflow Tutorial
Multiphase Flash
Introduction
The multiphase flash experiment tends to find more than two phases in systems with
Asphaltene/Waxes and/or with CO2 rich fluids at low temperatures. This tutorial demonstrates
multiphase flashes with both systems. The files for this tutorial are provided in the default PVTi
installation in the following directory:
$ECL/2007.1/pvti/tutorials
and should be copied to the local directory before starting the tutorial.
The tutorial is split into the following sections:
Start PVTi (if you are unsure about this see "Starting PVTi" on page 31).
View this oil composition by selecting Edit | Fundamentals and view the 10 component
oil.When finished click OK.
To add an experiment, click Edit | Experiments | Add | Single Point | Multiphase Flash.
Now we are going to split the C7+ fraction into it Paraffin, Naphthalene, and Aromatic
components, then redo the multiphase flash.
6
Click on the Complete folder to view the critical properties of these components.
We are going to run the MFLASH experiment again and view the phases present.
10 Click on GO .
Tutorials
Multiphase Flash
69
The Output Display shows the following 4 phases: Liquid, Wax, Asphaltene Liquid, and
Vapor.
11 Note that the compositions of the Wax is 100% PC7+ and the Asphaltene Liquid is 90.23%
AC7+.
12 Close the project, do not save the changes.
We will attempt to verify the phases present with a 0.8 fraction of MI with PVTi multiphase
flash.
70
View the compositions of the fluid sample by selecting Edit |Samples - Compositions.
Tutorials
Multiphase Flash
To create a mixture of 80% MI and 20% reservoir oil, select Edit | Sample | Mix.
Fluid Sample 1: Z1
Fluid Sample 2: MI
Temperature: 86 F
Click OK.
Now we will create multiphase flash experiments at a series of pressures (Temperature = 860
F) starting in the Liquid-Liquid region (1100 Psia) then through the Liquid-Liquid-Vapor region
and ending up in the Liquid-Vapor region (600 Psia).
8
Fluid Sample: .8 MI
Temperature: 86 F
10 Select Observations and enter 1100 (psia) as the Pressure = 1100 (psia).
11 Click Next> and Close.
We now have MFLASH1 defined.
12 To create additional MFLASH experiments at a series of lower pressure, right click on
MFLASH1 and select Clone.
13 Repeat for MFLASH2 through to MFLASH5.
We now have 5 MFLASH experiments defined.
14 To change the flash pressures right click on the MFLASH experiment and select Edit |
Observations | Pressure.
15 Enter the following pressure values:
a
The MFLASH5 experiment can sometimes label both the phases as liquid. However,
one of them is clearly a vapor as the density value is 5.64323 lb./ft.3.
Tutorials
Multiphase Flash
71
Note
If a standard two-phase flash is performed at the same temperature and pressure as with
the multiphase flash, then one obtains liquid and vapor phases with the same density
values as produced with the MFLASH5 experiment.
Summary
This tutorial demonstrated the multiphase flash experiment. It tends to find more than two
phases in systems with Asphaltene/Waxes and/or with CO2 rich fluids at low temperatures.
This tutorial demonstrates multiphase flashes with both systems.
References
Guler B. et al,
[Ref. 1]
SPE 71485,
72
Tutorials
Multiphase Flash
Start PVTi (if you are unsure about this see "Starting PVTi" on page 31).
Open THERMAL.PVI.
On the tree view there are two experiments defined, a Differential Liberation (DL1) and a
bubble point experiment (BUBBLE1). Right-click on the DL1 experiment and select Plot.
Three observations should have been plotted oil density, oil relative volume and oil
viscosity. You can see that the Equation of State (EoS) fluid model shows good agreement
with all 3 observations.
Note
Simulations using ECLIPSE Thermal tend to use fluids consisting of two or three
components.
Tutorials
Exporting an ECLIPSE Thermal model
73
Right-click on the sample ZI and select the Export ECLIPSE Thermal model...
Note
The default values here are Pmax=1000psia, Pmin=50psia, Tmax=400F and Tmin=50F
and are considered reasonable max/min parameters within a reservoir. However, every
reservoir is different and any knowledge of these parameters for your particular
reservoir should be entered.
To model component K-values we can either export the KVWI keyword, which models them
using Wilsons formula, or the KVCR keyword, which uses Crookstons formula. Crookstons
formula is in general much more accurate and we will use this. See "K-Values" on page 401 for
a more detailed description regarding the modeling of K-values.
4
Tick the box Export Crookston Coefficient? to tell PVTi that you wish to export the KVCR
keyword.
Since we are exporting the KVCR keyword we need to determine the values of the
coefficients of Crookstons equation to export. Click Fit Crookston Coefficients on the
panel to open the Fit Crookston Coefficients panel.
This panel shows Crookstons equation where p is the pressure, T is temperature and the
coefficients A-E are what we wish to determine values for.
Note
The Fit Crookston Coefficients panel enables you to calculate the optimum values of
the coefficients A-E in Crookstons formula, so that the best fit is found to PVTis EoS
predicted K-values for each component over the temperature and pressure range
defined by the user.
Select the Plot option in the Plot P, T Values Used in Fitting Crookston Coefficient?
box.
In order to find values for the chosen coefficients PVTi throws in 40 points at random
coordinates in the region you just defined in pressure-temperature space. The Plot option plots
these points on the screen for you after the fit has been performed. Ideally, we would like to them
superimposed on a phase plot.
8
Select PVTi: View | Samples | Phase Plot... and press OK to perform the phase plot.
Hint
You can also access the Superimpose option using the toolbar.
10 Now click Apply on the Fit Crookston Coefficients panel to start the run.
74
Tutorials
Exporting an ECLIPSE Thermal model
Once the run has finished a results panel appears. In the Coefficients folder the best fit
values of A, B and D are reported for each component.
11 Click on the Statistics panel.
The mean error and standard deviation (in %) are reported for each fit. The C1 and C5
components have been fitted very well (rms<1.5%) and the C20+ fraction has been fitted
reasonably well with an rms of somewhere between 7-9% (depending on the random
number generator on your machine).
Can we do better though?
Caution
Make sure you turn off the Superimpose option before moving to the next
section.
Click the View Fit button on the Fit Crookston Coefficients panel.
The Plot K-values vs Temperature or Pressure panel opens.
Hint
Plots can either be performed of K-values versus pressure (at constant temperature) or
K-values versus temperature (at constant pressure).
First we will look at the K-value versus temperature fits, which are dictated by the D and E
coefficients (just D in our case).
2
Enter 1250psia in the Enter Constant Pressure box and 400F and 200F as the
Maximum and Minimum Temperatures respectively. Now click Apply.
The PVTi EoS-based K-values are shown by the points and the K-values calculated using
Crookstons equation are shown by the curves.
Experiment by changing the value of the constant pressure in the range 1000<P<1500 (our
chosen pressure range) to see how well Crookstons formula models the temperature
dependence of the K-values at a given pressure.
In general, for the C20+ component, the D coefficient, models the observations pretty well
over the whole pressure-temperature range, although using the E coefficient as well may
well help slightly
Now enter the appropriate pressure range, which is 1500 psia and 1000 psia for the
maximum and minimum values. Click Apply.
Again, experiment by changing the value of the constant temperature in the range
200<T<400 to see how well Crookstons formula models the pressure dependence of Kvalues.
Tutorials
Exporting an ECLIPSE Thermal model
75
In particular it can be seen in the range 300<T<400 (for the C20+ component) that
Crookstons formula struggles to model the pressure dependence at pressures at
P<1100psia when using just the A and B coefficients. Using the C coefficient may well
improve things significantly.
You can see in particular, the K-value versus pressure curve for the C20+ component
struggles to fit the observations.The problem is that the term A+B/P starts to run into
problems for pressure values <1100psia (due to the strongly negative value of B) and
therefore we require the C coefficient to get a good fit.
7
Close the Crookston Report panel and the Plot K-values vs Temperature or Pressure?
panel.
Switch on the C and E coefficients by ticking the appropriate boxes on the Fit Crookston
Coefficients panel. Now click Apply.
This run will take slightly longer, as the introduction of the C and E terms vastly increases
the amount of parameter space that PVTi must search.
If we had decided to export the KVWI keyword (that is use Wilsons formula to model
K-values) then we would not have needed to fit the coefficients of Crookstons
equation and could have exported straight away from the Export for ECLIPSE
Thermal panel. Although this may be quicker, Crookstons formula models K-values
much better and spending this extra time is worthwhile.
Click Save.
The ECLIPSE Thermal fluid model is written to the specified file. This file can now be used
to model PVT behavior as part of an ECLIPSE Thermal simulation.
76
Tutorials
Exporting an ECLIPSE Thermal model
"Introduction" on page 77
Introduction
In addition to allowing an equation of state to be fitted to laboratory results and facilitating the
generation of ECLIPSE BlackOil/ Compositional PVT data, PVTi also provides material
balance checks to assess data quality. For information on the calculations involved in material
balance checking see "Compositional material balance" on page 307.
Note
Problems with the observations in a PVT report equate to problems with the fitted fluid
model. It is therefore recommended that material balance checks are carried out on all
PVT data.
In this tutorial an existing project file (GAS.PVI) is read into PVTi and the data are checked
and modified for material balance errors.
1
Start PVTi (if you are unsure about this see "Starting PVTi" on page 31).
Open GAS.PVI
Hint
The Data Tree should show that there are two experiments, CVD1, defined with 10
different types of observations, SEPS1 with observations of fluid mole fractions
(liquid and vapor) and CCE1 with observation of Vapor Z-Factor.
Click and drag the ZI node from the Data Tree and drop it into the Main Plot Window.
The phase envelope should look like Figure 5.6.
Tutorials
Data analysis and quality control
77
Note
78
Tutorials
Data analysis and quality control
Figure 5.7 The main display shows messages indicating the quality of the data
Warning
Warning
Warning
Warning
The messages show that some mole fractions were calculated as negative, so there are
clearly problems with the data. PVTi supplies various options for plotting the data to
ascertain the source of the errors. The first type of data check to perform is to view the
pressure variation of the gas compositions.
3
Select Vapor Compositions v Pressure in the Select Plot Type panel and click on
Plot.
Click Close
Click and drag the mouse to define the zoom area to approximately cover the region 2800
to 6500 psia and 0.1 to 2 vapor composition. After zooming in, the plot window should look
similar to Figure 5.8.
Tutorials
Data analysis and quality control
79
Many of the components have non-monotonically varying gas compositions. In general, there
are several fluids or analyses available, and bad data can be discarded. However, if no other data
is available PVTi offers tools to make modifications to the bad data.
Component
N2
CO2
...
IC4
NC4
IC5
NC5
C6
Percentage
10
10
...
10
20
Note
80
The other components are modified in proportion to their existing mole fractions.
Placing a letter in the thin column to the left of each column of modifiers allows the
proportion of that component to be fixed and thus not modified in proportion to its
existing mole fraction.
Click Report in the Material Balance panel to create a new material balance report.
Click on Yes to modify the compositions on CVD vapor and Liquid Composition
Modif... panel.
Click on No on the CVD vapor and Liquid Composition to ... panel so that the
compositions are saved, but retain their original values until after the modified results have
been examined.
Tutorials
Data analysis and quality control
Now none of the liquid mole percentages are negative. So this change to the data can be
accepted.
8
Select K-values:(1) log (k) v Pressure plot in the Select Plot Type panel and click on
Plot.
The plot window should now look like Figure 5.9.
The K-values should plot monotonically in that N2 should be the largest, followed by C1, etc.
This is clearly not the case, so although there are now no calculated negative compositions, the
modified fluid definition is not fully consistent.
Select the K-values:(2) Hoffman-Crump Plot in the Select Plot Type panel and click on
Plot.
Tutorials
Data analysis and quality control
81
In this plot, one line is generated for each pressure stage. The Hoffman F coefficients
correspond to C1, C2 etc. and the lowest to C11, C12+. In general, these lines should be
monotonic with pressure, with the highest pressure at the top. This plot shows most of the error
to be in the first stage.
Right-click on SEPS1 in the project tree-view and select Recombination... on the pop-up
menu.
Click Plot.
The two lines on the Hoffman-Crump-Hocott plot (Figure 5.11) show the actual data and
the Standing estimates of K-values. They are used as a consistency check and, in this case,
give further evidence that the initial feed stream composition is in error.
82
Tutorials
Data analysis and quality control
Recovery calculations
PVTi can allow recovery calculations to be performed if a valid Constant Composition
Expansion, Constant Volume Depletion and Separator test exist.
1
Right-click on CCE1 in the project tree-view and select Recovery... on the pop-up menu.
Hint
This assumes that there is no direct production of reservoir liquid. If you want to
include direct production of reservoir liquid, you need a relative permeability table,
which you can enter be clicking on Rel. Perm.
Note
PVTi runs the material balance check on the Constant Volume Depletion experiment
selected, and performs recombination on the Separator selected, before performing the
recovery calculation.
Discussion
This tutorial has illustrated how fluids may be examined for consistency and, if necessary,
modified, within a PVTi project.
Tutorials
Data analysis and quality control
83
"Introduction" on page 84
"Discussion" on page 86
Start PVTi (if you are unsure about this see "Starting PVTi" on page 31).
Open CLEAN.PVI.
Right-click on the sample ZI and select Fingerprint plot from the drop-down menu.
In naturally occurring hydrocarbons there is expected to be semi-log straight-line behaviour
for components C8+ (around a mole weight of 100). From the fingerprint plot, there is
clearly not straight-line behavior for this fluid.
The contaminating mud, like many oil-based muds, has a composition containing
components C10-C23. In the skimming method, it is assumed that the composition is not
known.
Right-click on the sample ZI and select Clean... from the drop-down menu.
a
Click OK.
PVTi: Options | Graph | Superimpose - and ensure that the Superimpose option is on.
Right-click on the sample CLEAN and select Fingerprint plot from the drop-down menu.
Right-click on the sample CONTAM and select Fingerprint plot from the drop-down menu.
The plot should now look like Figure 5.12.
84
Tutorials
Removing contamination from samples
Figure 5.12 The original sample, the cleaned sample and the estimated contaminant.
Right-click on the sample MUD and select Fingerprint plot from the drop-down menu.
The true composition of the contaminant contains components lighter than C8 and also up
to the plus-fraction (C25+). The skimming method could not remove this contaminant
completely, but the subtraction method can.
Click OK.
Right-click on the sample CLEAN2 and select Fingerprint plot from the drop-down menu.
Tutorials
Removing contamination from samples
85
Discussion
This tutorial showed how a fluid can be cleaned of oil-based contaminants such as drilling
muds. For information on how the skimming and subtraction methods work see "Removing
contamination from samples" on page 84.
In general different PVT samples contain different levels of contaminant. It is usually best to fit
the PVT reports from a number of (contaminated) samples. Once a consistent fluid model has
been developed, the samples can be cleaned using either of the methods outlined in this tutorial.
The cleaned samples can then be used in reservoir simulations.
86
Tutorials
Removing contamination from samples
"Introduction" on page 87
Introduction
The VERSION keyword, introduced in 2000A, allows a systematic method for updating old
PVI files to be compatible with the latest version of PVTi. This tutorial describes how the
keyword can be used to convert an old PVI file into the current version.
Caution
In OLD.PVI enter the VERSION keyword in the RUNSPEC section with a value of 98B.
Hint
If you are unsure of the form of the VERSION keyword see "VERSION" on page 280.
File | Close
Note
You could now use the file CONVERT.PVI in a normal session and PVTi interprets it
according to the version specified by the VERSION keyword.
Tutorials
Converting old projects to the current version
87
In this tutorial we go one step further and convert the PVI file to the current version.
Hint
You can compare the file NEW.PVI to OLD.PVI to see the differences (the DL
observation GFVF is converted from rb/stb to rb/Mscf and the heat capacity keywords
are added in the SYSTEM section).
Discussion
In this tutorial an old PVI file was converted to the latest version. This is important for files
using FIELD units, containing Differential Liberation (DL) experiments that have Gas
formation volume factor (GFVF) measurements as the units, for this type of observation was
changed in 99B from rb/stb to rb/Mscf to make PVTis units systems consistent with those of
the ECLIPSE simulators.
88
Tutorials
Converting old projects to the current version
Reference section
Chapter 6
General information
"View" on page 95
Reference section
General information
89
90
"Edit" on page 94
"View" on page 95
"Run" on page 96
"Utilities" on page 97
"Graph" on page 97
Reference section
Main PVTi window
Data Tree
Log Window
Equation of State
The main window contains all the tools necessary for Equation of State model fitting.
Basic features
The Data Tree provides a view of the current projects contents. Each fluid sample is identified
with its experiments as sub-nodes in the tree. Likewise, each experiment has its observations as
sub-nodes. The Log Window is updated with pertinent information relating to actions taken in
PVTi. The Equation of State, upon which the current fluid model is based, is indicated in the
status bar. The Main Plot Window and the Sub-plots provide an area for viewing project
information graphically.
Reference section
The PVTi main module
91
File
The File menu allows you to open, close and save PVTi project files (PVI files) and import
sections from PVI files, and provides access to keyword export modules. Graph printing and
plotting facilities are also available from this menu.
To open this menu, select File from the main PVTi window.
New...
This creates a new PVTi project.
Open...
Opens a PVTi project (PVI) file. The complete file is read in and the most recent fluid
model, experiment descriptions, observations, etc., are restored. For more information on
the files PVTi creates see "Files created by PVTi" on page 93.
Close...
Closes the current project. If the project is not empty you are asked if you want to save
before closing.
Save...
Saves the current PVI file, overwriting the previously saved project.
Save As...
Saves the current project to a new PVI file.
Save (concise)...
Saves a concise version of the current project containing the latest version of the fluid
model plus any experiments and observations used in simulation and regression. No other
information is saved, therefore information regarding regression variables or split/group
sections will not be recorded by the Save (concise) option.
Export Keywords
This provides access to the Keyword Export modules. Currently PVTi supports export for
the ECLIPSE simulators and VFPi. See "Exporting keywords" on page 133.
Import
This option allows a section from a previous PVI project or ECLIPSE data-set to be
imported or a concise PVI project to be merged with the current project. The sections that
can be imported here are SYSTEM,GROUP, SPLIT,SIMULATE and REGRESS. See
"Reading the SYSTEM section from a PVI or DATA File" on page 98.
Exit
This exits PVTi. If there is an active project, you are asked whether you would like to save
the project before exiting.
92
Reference section
The PVTi main module
Hint
The .NEW file contains all the changes made during the last session. If you change the
file extension to .PVI you can use it to recover the session.
Only one project at a time can be in use with a single run of PVTi. To open another project, close
the current project, either by selecting the File | Open option (the program prompts you save
the session to a new .PVI file) or by using File | Close.
Note
Although only one project may be in use by the program, different sections of different
.PVI files may be read in.
Reference section
The PVTi main module
93
Edit
The Edit menu allows entry and editing of the fluid model, samples, experiments, observations
and regression variables.
1
To open this menu, select Edit from the main PVTi window.
Fundamentals...
This opens the Fundamentals panel, See "Fluid Properties Estimation" on page 34.
Fluid Model
This opens the sub-menu of fluid model editing options.
Equation of State... This opens the Equation of State selection panel. See "Equation
of State" on page 100.
Binary Interaction Coefficients... This opens the binaries panel. See "Binary
Interaction Coefficients" on page 104.
Split This opens the sub-menu of options for splitting fluid components. See "Splitting
components" on page 105.
Whitson...
Multi-feed...
PNA Distribution
Group...
Samples.
This opens the sub-menu of sample entry and editing options.
Experiments...
See "Defining Experiments" on page 117.
Observations...
See "Defining Observations" on page 122.
94
Reference section
The PVTi main module
View
The View menu provides facilities for plotting and reporting.
1
To open this menu select View from the main PVTi window.
Observations... This allows you to plot an observations against calculated values, or any
calculated values where corresponding observations do not exist.
Library. This option allows you to view the internal PVTi library. See "Library" on page 95.
Library
The properties of library components are preset by the program.
To display the current list of library components select View | Library...
Table 6.1
Mnemonic
Name
Mnemonic
Name
H2 O
Water
N2
Nitrogen
H2
Hydrogen
H2 S
Hydrogen Sulfide
CO2
Carbon Dioxide
CO
Carbon Monoxide
C1
Methane
C2
Ethane
C3
Propane
C4
Butane
iC 4
Iso-Butane
nC 4
Normal Butane
C5
Pentane
iC 5
Iso-Pentane
nC 5
Normal Pentane
C6
Hexanes
C6 H6
Benzene
C7 H8
Toluene
C7
Heptanes
C8
Octanes
C9
Nonanes
C 10
Decanes
C 11
Undecanes
C 12
Dodecanes
C 13
Tridecanes
C 14
Tetradecanes
C 15
Pentadecanes
C 16
Hexadecanes
C 17
Heptadecanes
C 18
Octadecanes
C 19
Nonadecanes
C 20
Eicosanes
Reference section
The PVTi main module
95
Table 6.1
Mnemonic
Name
Mnemonic
Name
C 21
C21s
C 22
C22s
C 23
C23s
C 24
C24s
C 25
C25s
C 26
C26s
C 27
C27s
C 28
C28s
C 29
C29s
C 30
C30s
C 31
C31s
C 32
C32s
C 33
C33s
C 34
C34s
C 35
C35s
C 36
C36s
C 37
C37s
C 38
C38s
C 39
C39s
C 40
C40s
C 41
C41s
C 42
C42s
C 43
C43s
C 44
C44s
C 45
C45s
Note
Obvious candidates for the pseudoisation of components for use in large regressions or
compositional simulation are iso-butane and normal butane, and iso-pentane and normal
pentane, into single butane and pentane components. A study of many PVT reports [Ref. 19]
has shown that the typical ratios of iC4 : nC 4 , iC5 : nC 5 are 0.67:0.33 and 0.60:0.40 respectively.
The library also contains two other components, with the mnemonics C4 and C 5 , whose
properties are mole-weighted averages of the respective iso and normal component properties.
Run
The Run menu provides simulation and regression facilities.
The following options are available:
Save As Samples .
If this option is turned on, any samples created by an experiment can be saved as additional
project samples.
96
Reference section
The PVTi main module
Simulate
This simulates all active experiments and then display the simulation results in a text editor.
PVTi has intelligent simulation, which means that the results of the last simulation run are
stored, and if no change has been made to the experimental data the simulation run is not
repeated, the results from the previous run being used. This keeps the time spent running
simulations to a minimum.
Regression...
This opens the Regression panel. See "Regression in PVTi" on page 126.
Utilities
The Utilities menu option provides access to miscellaneous information relating to the project
and program set-up.
Units...
See "Units..." on page 144.
Standard Conditions...
See "Standard conditions..." on page 145.
Program
This opens the sub-menu of program configuration options.
Options... This opens the Options panel which mimics the OPTIONS keyword in the
PVI file. See "Program options" on page 145.
Text Editor
This opens the text editor used for displaying simulation results, etc. It can be used to view
any ASCII file.
Graph
The Graph menu provides options related to the plotting of graphs.
Superimpose
When the superimpose option is switched on, indicated by a tick next to the menu option,
subsequent graphs are superimposed on the current main graph.
Tabulate...
This option creates a table showing the values plotted in the current main graph.
Remove All
This option deletes all graphs from the window.
Reference section
The PVTi main module
97
To display PVI data, select PVTi: File | View PVI Section | SYSTEM.
You can load the first two sections of a PVI file as a system specification, rather than
using menu options. Additionally, you can choose to echo the contents of the whole
PVI file to the current print file, PVP.
PVTi: File | Import | ECLIPSE Compositional (*.DATA) and select the appropriate
DATA file.
PVTi searches for the required file and, if found, reads it looking for the number of EoS and
Equilibration regions in the ECLIPSE model. The number of reservoir EoS regions is
defined by the ninth entry of the TABDIMS keyword and the number of Equilibration
regions is defined by the first entry of the EQLDIMS keyword. If the ECLIPSE model has
just one of each region type then the program simply reads in the data. However if multiple
EoS or Equilibration regions are found then the program displays a prompt specifying the
numbers of each region found. You are asked to specify which EoS and/or Equilibration
region they wish to read in.
Select the number of the EoS and /or Equilibration region you wish to load.
Note
EoS regions each have an EoS model defined within them that is an EoS plus a list of
critical properties defined for each component. An Equilibration region is a group of
cells where the initial pressure and saturation is defined. PVTi needs to know which
Equilibration region to read in if there are any composition versus depth (specified by
the ZMFVD or COMPVD keywords) tables in the ECLIPSE file. There is one table for
each of the Equilibration regions. By specifying which Equilibration region to use this
tells PVTi which table to read in.
PVTi: File | Import PVI Section | SYSTEM and select the appropriate PVI file.
PVTi searches for the required file and, if found, reads it looking for all occurrences of the
required section. If there are no RUNSPEC or SYSTEM sections in the file then no further
action is required. However, if one of more sections of the required type are found in the
file, you must select which, if any, are required. The program displays a prompt specifying
the number of sections found.
98
Reference section
The fluid model
Note
If more than one section is found, the program offers the last section as the default,
although you can read any of the sections.
Hint
If you are uncertain as to the contents of the selected section, use File | View PVI
Section to display the section to the screen.
The syntax of the external file is similar to that of ECLIPSE. The data file is free format, except
for keywords, which must start in column 1. For further information on the keywords see "PVTi
keywords" on page 167. An example of such a file for a trivial two-component CO2 -isoButane
system is as follows:
-----RUNSPEC section: specific number of components and the EoS
---RUNSPEC
NCOMPS
2 /
EOS
PR /
------SYSTEM section: define hydrocarbon properties and composition
---SYSTEM
---Unit conventions
UNITS
METRIC
ABSOL
FRACTION /
DEGREES
KELVIN /
---Component names (library defaults)
LNAMES
CO2
IC4 /
---Overwrite default omega values by component
OMEGAA
0.4572
0.4572 /
OMEGAB
0.0778
0.0778 /
---Initial sample composition
ZI
0.6
0.4 /
---Binary Interaction Coefficients
BIC
2
1
1
0.13 /
/
---------------END
Reference section
The fluid model
99
Any characters following ---- are taken as comments. The data is free format, apart from
keywords which should start in column 1. You can split data over lines as required. The
forward slash (/) characters terminate data for a keyword.
You can specify repeat counts for any item. For example 3 * 1.0 implies three values of 1.0.
You can enter defaults by specifying a repeat count alone, such as 1*, or by the early
termination of a data list with a forward slash (/).
You may enclose character data such as component or experiment names in quotes. This is
optional and is only strictly required when the name contains embedded spaces or nonalphanumeric characters.
Equation of State
Hint
This panel allows you to choose one of five main equations of state, to specify the required
viscosity correlation, and to decide whether or not to activate editing of specific heat capacities.
The equations of state are described in "Equation of state" on page 316; the viscosity options
are described in "Viscosity correlations" on page 329 and in [Ref. 5], [Ref. 7] & [Ref. 41].
The available equations of state are:
Peng-Robinson
Soave-Redlich-Kwong
Redlich-Kwong
Zudkevitch-Joffe
Schmidt-Wenzel
100
RK: Redlich-Kwong
ZJ: Zudkevitch-Joffe
SW: Schmidt-Wenzel.
Check the box for Yes, or leave it unchecked for No, as appropriate (see "Equation of state"
on page 316).
Reference section
The fluid model
It has been our experience that the Peneloux et al. three-parameter equations of state,
PR3 and SRK3, generally give much better predictions of liquid properties and
saturations.
They also allow you an additional set of regression parameters, namely the component
volume shifts, making for an easier match to measured data.
Viscosity correlations
The Lohrenz-Bray-Clark, Pedersen and Aasberg-Petersen viscosity models are available. Select
the appropriate viscosity model.
Note
You can re-select the equation of state or viscosity correlation at any stage. However,
the default EoS parameters for each component are dependent upon the EoS, and the
program re-initializes these if you change the EoS. Alternatively you can manually
reset the parameters to the default values at any time.
Components
PVTi: Edit | Fluid Model | Components...
Enter the mnemonic for the component and select its type.
See "Component types" on page 102.
Click on Apply.
Library shows the properties that were retrieved from the internal library
Reference section
The fluid model
101
Component types
Library
The PVTi program checks this against the internal library of names. If this exists in the internal
library, it adopts the internal description. If it does not recognize the mnemonic from amongst
the set described in the previous section, you must re-enter the mnemonic name or respecify the
component as a Char or User type, see below.
User
This option allows you to define components. Enter the required properties into the panel:
critical pressure and temperature, acentric factors, etc.
You should enter the components in order of increasing molecular weight, and nonhydrocarbons before hydrocarbons:
Non-Hydrocarbons
H2
H2 O
CO
N2
H2 S
CO 2
Hydrocarbons
C1
C2
CN+
Hint
By selecting PVTi: Run | Check fluid system the fluid is re-ordered into increasing
mole weights.
PVTi allows you to input a user component even if you know only the critical temperature and
pressure. It calculates the other properties as follows:
from T c and P c - Riazi-Daubert. For further information see [Ref. 30] and [EQ 8.11],
Tb
[EQ 8.12].
from T c and T b - Riazi-Daubert. For further information see [Ref. 30] and [EQ 8.11],
Sg
[EQ 8.12].
Mw
from T b , T b and Sg - Riazi-Daubert. For further information see [Ref. 30] and [EQ
102
from P c , T b and T c - Edmister. For further information see [Ref. 30] & [EQ 8.10].
from Macleod and Sugden. For further information see [Ref. 14].
Reference section
The fluid model
Vc
Use the Update button to calculate the other properties of the component.
Characterization
If you give a characterization, you must generally specify at least two out of the following (these
are specified in the Characterization folder):
molecular weight M w ,
specific gravity Sg ,
reference temperature K
Hint
If you have more than two of the set M w , S g , T b and K w , we recommend that you enter
the best two first, as the order of entry decides which pair the program selects. For
example, if you enter M w , T b and K w then the program uses M w and T b .
Note
You can choose from the following correlations for estimating the physical properties and
acentric factors:
Critical properties
Acentric factors
Note
When reading in a file the critical volumes (Vc) and critical Z factors (Zc) for each
component must satisfy the relation PcVc=ZcRTc (where Tc, Pc, R are the critical
temperatures, critical pressures and universal gas constant respectively). If this is not
the case then PVTi will alter the values of the relevant critical Z-factors in order that
this relation is satisfied.
Reference section
The fluid model
103
Volume shifts
Note
Volume shifts are only available if you use a three-parameter Equation of State.
Use this option to enter the dimensionless volume shifts. The actual volume shifts in the
equation of state are displayed beside them.
1
Click on OK.
Note
If the "Temperature dependence for volume shifts" on page 147 option is set then you
can enter a value for THERMX, the thermal expansion coefficient.
Thermal properties
Note
You can only use this option if the program option "Specify/Calculate density and
molar volume units" on page 147 is switched on. It can be switched on in the Equation
of State panel (see "Equation of State" on page 100).
Specific heat capacity coefficients and calorific values for each component are the thermal
properties used in PVTi.
1
Click on OK.
LBC Viscosity coefficients are only available if you are using the LBC Viscosity
model.
104
Reference section
The fluid model
Click on OK.
Splitting components
This menu allows for the automatic splitting of the plus fraction into a required number of subfractions for subsequent use in a large regression or for output to a compositional simulator such
as the one in ECLIPSE.
Splitting is also used to accommodate different plus-fraction properties for different fluid
samples. This process is often known as a multi-feed split.
This option allows you to input data for splitting the plus fraction. There are three methods
available from this option for splitting the plus fraction, which must be the last component:
Whitson
To choose the splitting method, select PVTi: Edit | Fluid Model | Split and select the
splitting option.
Specify the Whitson Alpha Factor and the Whitson ETA factor, as required.
Enter the Critical Props. Correlation and the Acentric Props. Correlation.
Click on OK.
Specify the first single carbon number (SCN) group to be included in the plus fraction split.
For example, enter 7 if plus fraction is C 7+ .
Give the molecular weight, specific gravity and the mole fraction of the plus fraction.
Enter the number of pseudo-components to be used after the regrouping of the Whitson
split.
For example, N MCN = 3 .
Specify the Critical Props Correlation and the Acentric Props. Correlation.
Choose whether you wish to plot a fingerprint of the Whitson split fractions.
Click on OK.
Reference section
The fluid model
105
Confirm the default minimum mole weight in the plus fraction (Whitson -parameter) or
edit the data as required.
Confirm the default mole weight of the heaviest pseudo-component or edit the data as
required.
The default setting is twice the plus fraction mole weight.
Specify the group and the molecular weight of the samples plus fraction.
Note
Note that splitting is not necessarily the opposite of grouping. Splitting the plus
fraction into two or more pseudo-components, followed by a re-grouping of those
pseudo-components back into a single plus fraction, generally results in a different set
of critical properties, etc., from those originally possessed by the plus fraction.
PNA Distribution
This splits all components heavier than the library C6 component into paraffinic (P),
naphthalenic (N), and aromatic (A) components. This is done according to the method outlined
in "The PNA distribution of heavy components" on page 394. The critical properties assigned
to the PNA components are those described in "Critical properties of PNA species" on
page 395.
Group
This menu allows for the automatic grouping of sub-fractions for subsequent use in a large
regression or for output to a compositional simulator such as the one in ECLIPSE.
This option allows you to choose components to group and perform the grouping operation. The
default scheme for grouping is to group to the default sample ZI using the mole fraction
weighting to group components. Other schemes of grouping include grouping by molecular
weight and by mixing rule, see [Ref. 44]. Also the sample to group to can be changed to any in
the defined set, or to an average of all samples.
To group components, select PVTi: Edit | Fluid Model | Group...
This displays the current component system, each component having an associated index. The
first time you enter this option, all these indices are set to 0, indicating that they do not belong
to any group.
1
To create a new pseudo component, give a new index of greater than zero to two or more
components.
Hint
106
Reference section
The fluid model
You can perform several groupings from the same original component description by
specifying the new components with ascending indices, 1, 2, etc.
Click on the Update button to automatically display any of these new component names.
Note
Note that splitting is not necessarily the opposite of grouping. That is, splitting the plus
fraction into two or more pseudo-components, followed by a re-grouping of those
pseudo-components back into a single plus fraction, generally results in a different set
of critical properties, etc., from those originally possessed by the plus fraction.
Defining Samples
Sample names
1
Defines sample names. Use this option to enter mnemonics for each component. You can enter
more than one sample for later use; to do this, reference each sample by its mnemonic, of up to
8 characters.
Note
Note that the mnemonic for the default sample is ZI, for z initial.
For alternative samples, you may specify a line of text to give additional information. For
example: from different depths in the hydrocarbon column, a saved calculated composition
from a simulation, etc.
Sample compositions
1
Enter the compositions for each defined sample. PVTi ensures that they all add up to unity. If a
sample does not add up to unity, a message appears asking whether or not the program should
redistribute the difference across the components.
Sample salinities
1
This option allows you to enter sample salinities. If you have entered H 2 O as a component then
use this option to add the salinity of each sample.
Note
This information is used in the MFLASH experiment in the "Simulation using PVTi"
on page 117.
Reference section
The fluid model
107
Mixing samples
This option allows you to form a new sample by mixing any two existing samples. You can enter
the amount of each sample to mix either as the mole fraction of the second sample in the
resulting mixture, or as a volume of gas of the second sample as a ratio to the volume of the first
sample at its P sat or other pressure at the specified mix temperature. The latter case is useful
when considering lean gas injections into an oil.
The program produces the required mix provided that:
The number of samples does not exceed the maximum allowed (50).
Enter the temperature with its units, and the mole fraction.
If you are mixing by GOR, give the GOR and the pressure for GOR oil volume
calculation
Click on OK.
If the sample is mixed by recombination, the GOR is taken as the stock tank GOR, the
conditions are separator conditions and the mixture is created such that the stock tank GOR
matches the required value.
Viewing samples
Sample fingerprint plot
This option allows you to generate fingerprint plots. This consists of plotting the logarithm of
the component mole fractions against the component molecular weights.
Hint
Fingerprint plots give an idea of the nature, that is condensate or volatile oil, of a given
fluid sample. Providing a reasonable split of the Heptanes plus is available, then a
condensate typically has straight line or down-turning slope proceeding towards the
heavier fractions, whilst a volatile oil has an up-turning slope as it usually contains
more heavy fractions.
108
Select the sample you wish to plot and click on Apply. An example of a plot is shown in
Figure 6.2.
Reference section
The fluid model
Click on OK.
Hint
A default phase plot (with one quality line) can be generated by simply dragging a
sample name from the Data Tree and dropping it into the Main Plot Window.
Note
If depletion experiments or separators exist, they are plotted onto the phase plot too.
Reference section
The fluid model
109
Select the component groupings and the names of the grouped components.
Hint
110
Reference section
The fluid model
The default component groupings are: C1 and the non-hydrocarbons, C2-C6 and C7
and heavier hydrocarbons. This is typically the best choice, so you should only need to
change the groupings from the default in special cases.
Reference section
The fluid model
111
It is important to always examine PVT laboratory data for material balance errors.
If the reported observations contain serious errors, these will be reflected in the
fitted equation of state model.
It is generally the case that for gas condensate and volatile oil samples, a constant volume
depletion experiment (CVD) is performed as part of a laboratory analysis. Using material
balance considerations, it is possible to calculate liquid compositions and hence K -values,
molar masses, densities, etc. This can be very useful for two reasons:
1
With appropriate separator data, estimates of oil and gas recovery can be performed without
recourse to an equation of state model.
The consistency checks provide a measure of the quality of laboratory data and
consequently its value or otherwise in any subsequent regression analysis.
Report
Plot
This gives access to the full range of material balance diagnostic plots. For more details on
these plots see "Consistency checks and correlations" on page 307.
112
Modify
Reference section
COMB - Compositional Material Balance
Report
This option performs the material balance calculation and produces a report on any current
problems with the fluid.
Figure 6.5 Main display after performing material balance
Plot
Use this option to perform plots.
The set of plots available from this option are:
Liquid composition
K -values
Produced moles
Reference section
COMB - Compositional Material Balance
113
Produced mass
K -values
Modify
Use this option to modify data. Errors in the input data may become evident after you performed
the CVD material balance. You can use this option to rectify these errors. You may consider
changing the saturation pressure liquid saturations, Z -factors, etc.
Hint
114
You can avoid calculated liquid mole fractions remaining in the cell by changing the
composition of the feed stream (well stream) or one or more of the removed gas
streams.
Reference section
COMB - Compositional Material Balance
Separator recombination
Use this panel to directly test the quality of recombinations. To open this panel,
right-click on the separator experiment in the project-tree and select Material Balance... from
the pop-up menu.
Report
Use this option to test recombinations. It generates the calculated and Standing's K -values and
provides a report on the results.
Testing combinations
If sufficient volumetrics data has been entered in the previous item the recombined sample is
calculated and output to the report and PVP file.
The output details the calculated feed to either separator using the given values of GOR, oil
density and liquid and vapor compositions from each separator stage and is printed together
with the given feed composition for comparison.
Plot
Use this option to plot the recombination results. It produces a Hoffmann-Crump-Hocott plot,
which gives a measure of the quality of the separator data.
This option is only available if there are valid depletion and separators experiments in
the project, in addition to the CCE experiment.
Reference section
COMB - Compositional Material Balance
115
Rel. Perm.
Use this option to define liquid production. If oil is to be produced in the recovery calculations
(using the method of Reudelhuber Hinds, [Ref. 37]), you must enter two points on the plot of
relative permeability versus total liquid saturation.
Report
Use this option to perform recovery calculations. It allows you to estimate recoveries of vapor
and liquid.
Plot
Use this option to produce a plot of the gas and oil recovered as a function of pressure.
116
Reference section
COMB - Compositional Material Balance
Flash calculation
Swelling tests
Separators
Vaporization tests
multiphase flash.
Note
You can enter any experimentally determined observations available to compare with
the output produced by the Simulate module, apart from the multiphase flash
experiment.
Defining Experiments
1
To add a new experiment select it on the Add menu. To edit an existing experiment, select
its name from the drop-down list, which appears in the panel, and click OK.
Once an experiment has been created for definition or selected for editing, you will see a
customizable form that can be tailored to suit your data. The information is entered in a
number of folders.
In the first folder, General, you can select various single-valued pieces of information for
entry. The required information is automatically selected and cannot be deselected, so an
information line informs that this data is required.
The second folder, Observations, shows a table where you can customize column
headings to match your observation data. If you are editing an existing experiment, the
observations in the currently defined set are already shown as column headings. In this way
you can match the data entry panel to your own data-set. If you forget to enter a required
quantity (for example Pressure in a Differential Liberation experiment - see "Differential
liberation" on page 119) PVTi warns you and does not create the customized entry form.
Reference section
Simulation using PVTi
117
The third folder, Components, allows you to determine whether you enter componentbase data or not. Typical options here are for Liquid Mole Fractions, Vapor Mole Fractions
or K-values.
The fourth folder, Other, is used for miscellaneous observations that do not fit any of the
other categories. Currently this folder is only used by the Constant Volume Depletion
experiment for the Final Liquid Mole Fraction. When other experiments are being entered,
this folder does not appear.
Click Apply.
A customized form is now created, with the same folders as described above. Now the
folders contain data-entry fields and tables for observations. Once the data have been
entered, click on Apply to submit the data and create or edit the experiment.
10 Finally, Close becomes active and can be used to close the panel
The gas-oil ratio reported by the calculation is defined as gas volume at standard
conditions divided by liquid volume at flash conditions. The gas volume is obtained
using a Z -factor of unity.
If the temperature is such that no bubble point can be found (above the critical
temperature) the program returns a warning message.
If the temperature is such that no dew point can be found (above the critical
temperature) the program returns a warning message.
118
Reference section
Simulation using PVTi
Hint
You can apply this experiment to a liquid (bubble point) or vapor (dew point) system.
The program tests for both possibilities. It is also possible to perform a constant
composition expansion on a true one-phase system (SIN), such as an (dry) injection
gas above its cricondentherm.
Note
You can apply this experiment to a liquid (bubble point) or vapor (dew point) system.
The program tests for both possibilities. It is not, however, possible to apply this
experiment to samples that are above the cricondentherm.
Note
The relative volume reported by the program is the fraction of the cell filled with liquid
at the end of the constant volume step, that is after the original volume has been
restored by removing vapor.
Differential liberation
For this experiment you must specify a temperature and a series of pressures. You do not need
to give a value at the bubble point. PVTi provides this pressure point.
The program also provides automatically the last step in the differential liberation process, the
reduction to standard conditions. However, the program does not provide the pressure point at
standard pressure (usually 14.7psia) and at reservoir temperature and the user must enter this for
the final stage.
Note
You may only apply this experiment to a liquid (bubble point) system.
Hint
The relative volume reported by the program is the ratio of the oil volume at each step
to the oil volume at the final (standard conditions) step.
Note
There are alternative definitions of the GOR and the relative oil volume available using
the program options "Definition of GOR in Diff. Lib." on page 148 and "Definition of
Oil relative volume in Diff. Lib." on page 149.
Swelling test
A swelling test consists of adding increasing amounts of a lean gas to a reservoir fluid and
determining the swelling of the mixture relative to the original fluid composition.
For this experiment you must specify:
Reference section
Simulation using PVTi
119
A set of either mole percentages of gas in the mixture or GORs (the volume of gas at STC,
that is 14.7 psi and 60 F , per volume of oil at original saturation pressure or other specified
pressure).
Separators
Separators consist of a set of connected equilibrium flashes at user prescribed pressures and
temperatures.
For this experiment you must specify:
1
The composition of the feed stream from the defined sample mnemonics.
A number of stages (up to seven) for which you must give a pressure and temperature.
Additionally, you must connect the vapor and liquid outputs of each stream to some subsequent
stream. The default routing is to connect the liquid output of stage (j) to stage (j+1), and to take
the vapor output to stock tank conditions (as defined by the STCOND keyword or by the
Standard Conditions menu option under OPTIONS).
Note
A stage output can be fed back to any previous stage though not back to the current
stage. No stock tank stage is defined automatically, and whereas it is customary to
quote vapor properties at stock tank conditions, liquid properties will be quoted at the
final stage conditions. Therefore, if liquid properties at stock tank conditions are
required, this should be the final (additional) stage which must be defined by the user.
For example if we have a separator with 3 stages with the last stage being stock tank
conditions, then a liquid FVF at stage 1 of the separator will be the volume of liquid
divided by the final liquid volume (stock tank conditions in this case) after flashing the
liquid feed of stage 1 through the remaining 2 stages of the separator chain.
Hint
The "Definition of Oil relative volume in Diff. Lib." on page 149 program option
allows you to quote GORs as volume of gas at standard conditions per volume of stock
tank oil as opposed to the default calculation of volume of gas at standard conditions
per volume of separator liquid at separator conditions.
The program can calculate oil formation volume factors, that is the volume of reservoir fluid at
initial or bubble point conditions per stock tank volume (SRELV) and, by separator stage,
volume of separator liquid at separator conditions per stock tank oil volume (ORELV).
To use this option tick the box in the panel or use the FVFREF keyword in batch mode.
120
A set of depths above and/or below the reference depth, at which you wish the program to
calculate the composition and pressure.
Reference section
Simulation using PVTi
If during the increment up and/or down, either a genuine gas-oil contact is found or a transition
from gas to oil (or vice-versa) without passing through a contact (a critical transition), then
the program reports this depth.
Note
The assumptions made in the performance of this experiment, that there are no
asphaltenes and that the reservoir is in thermal, gravitational and diffusive equilibrium,
are probably not achieved in any real reservoir. However, despite these reservations,
this is a useful test of the depth-variation of a particular fluid.
Vaporization test
This is a somewhat specialised test performed for gas-injection on reservoir fluids, but in fact it
is rather similar to a swelling test.
For this experiment you must specify:
1
The composition of the reservoir fluid and injection fluid from the currently defined sample
mnemonics.
The gas-oil ratio reported by the calculation is defined as gas volume at standard
conditions divided by liquid volume at flash conditions. The gas volume is obtained
using a Z -factor of unity. Note also no facility currently exists for comparing these
against observed values.
Note
If the sample you select for the experiment contains water, you should enter the salinity
in the PROPS section.
In the case of the dew point, program returns the retrograde (highest pressure) dew
point.
Reference section
Simulation using PVTi
121
The drive to simulate (either condensing where the remaining oil is kept after each flash
and contacted with the initial gas sample, or vaporizing where the remaining gas is kept
after each flash and contacted with the original oil sample)
The fractions of remaining oil/gas to be contacted with the original gas/oil at each stage.
Hint
You can use this experiment in the REGRESS section. For further information see
"Regression in PVTi" on page 126.
Defining Observations
Observations can be defined at the same time as the experiment; see "Defining Experiments" on
page 117.
1
122
Reference section
Simulation using PVTi
If you are entering data for regression purposes, give weightings, either individual or
global, for the observation types.
The observations available vary with experiment type, but will be from the following set:
Table 6.2
Observation data
Abbreviation
Observation
Liquid Z-Factor
Liquid Z -factor
Vapor Z-Factor
vapor Z -factor
Liquid Density
Liquid density
Vapor Density
Vapor density
Liquid Visc.
Liquid viscosity
Vapor Visc.
vapor viscosity
Liquid Sat.
Liquid saturation
Vapor Sat.
Vapor saturation
Sat. Pressure
Sat. Temperature
Gas-Oil Ratio
Relative Vol.
Ternary Plot
K Values
K -values
Moles Recov.
Final liq. mol. frac. Liquid mole fraction of final stage of CVD (COMB Mat. Bal.)
Gas Gravity
Reference section
Simulation using PVTi
123
Table 6.2
Abbreviation
Observation
Gas FVF
2-phase Z
Note
Note that not all the observed data types are available for all experiments.
Running a simulation
Note
1
Simulations are automatically run on creation, so the results are immediately available.
CCE :
Soave-Redlich-Kwong (3-Parm) on Z1
Lohrenz-Bray-Clark Viscosity Correlation
Density units are
KG/M3
Viscosity units are
CPOISE
Surface Tension units are
DYNES/CM
Deg K
Specified temperature
377.5944
Hint
124
-----------Liq Density
-----------Calculated
-----------682.4368
676.7593
670.6133
663.9241
655.0453
653.4620
651.8460
650.1961
PVTi recognizes which experiment simulations are up to date and then only performs
necessary calculations. This means that to view the simulation results you should
always use PVTi: Run | Simulate.
Reference section
Simulation using PVTi
Hint
If you click on an experiment in the sample-tree using the right mouse button, and
select Report... from the drop-down menu, you can see the report for that experiment
on its own.
Reference section
Simulation using PVTi
125
Regression in PVTi
Introduction
Performing a regression
To perform a regression you must specify:
The experiments to be used in the regression. You can choose from the experiments
mentioned in "Defining Experiments" on page 117.
The weighting for the observations associated with those experiments. You can use most of
the observations given in a laboratory experiment as observations to match against
predicted data.
The Equation of State parameters you wish to vary to match predicted to observed
quantities. Most of the Equation of State parameters are available as regression variables.
Note
The time taken for the regression operation rises rapidly with the number of variables
chosen, and the use of the minimum possible set is suggested. That said, any
combination of critical point data, a and b values, acentric factors, binary
interaction coefficients, ij and volume shift parameters (if the PR3 or SRK3 forms for
the Equation of State are being used) may be chosen to be modified. There is a
maximum total of 50 regression variables.
Regression function
The regression function to be minimized is the normalized root mean square (RMS) error of
predicted experiment results to the given (weighted) observed experiment results. See "Details
Folder" on page 131 for a description of the RMS value used.
Note
In order to run the regression, there must be at least as many observations as chosen
regression variables.
Regression Panel
1
Use this menu to set up and perform regression. To open this menu, select PVTi: Edit |
Regression
Variables
The Variables section has the following options:
126
Reference section
Regression in PVTi
PVTi Selects
This sets up the regression variables according to the rules given in "Physical selection of
regression parameters" on page 386.
Variables... Opens a panel specific to the selection of variable types (see above).
Limits... Sets limits on regression variables. For further information see "Setting regression
limits" on page 129.
Report
The Report section has the following buttons:
Regression: Opens the Regression Report panel. See"Regression Report" on page 130.
Regress
The Regress section is for running regressions. The buttons in this section are:
Accept / Reject: Accept or reject the last regression. For further information see
"Accepting or reject regression results" on page 130.
Additional Information
Defining regression variables...
Use this option to define/re-define the set of variables for use in the regression. There may be
two sets of variables available for use in regression, depending on the state of the "Program
options" on page 145 and whether modified Whitson splitting (SCT) has been used on the plus
fraction. The two sets are denoted normal and special.
The normal variables are the component dependent ones, that is variables such as critical
properties, acentric factors, etc.
The special variables are system-wide or multi-component variables such as the thermal
expansion coefficient or the Cheuh-Prausnitz A -factor for binary interaction coefficients.
Reference section
Regression in PVTi
127
Pc
Tc
Hint
Vc
Vc
Hint
If you wish to vary a given EoS parameter, say T c , of two or more components as
separate independent quantities, you should give them different values. For example
1,2,..., etc.
If you wish to vary the parameters as one or more groups of variables, you should give
the required group members the same integer. This may be particularly useful when
trying to vary V c values to match to viscosity data using the LBC correlation, for
example.
PR3
SRK3
Note
All of these data fields can take an integer value, 0,1,2,..., and so on. The default of
zero (or blank/null field) implies that the particular components EoS parameter is not
to be used in any subsequent regression.
Use the second panel to define the status of the lower half of the (symmetric, zero-diagonal)
matrix of binary interaction coefficients.
Note
128
Reference section
Regression in PVTi
Note that the rules regarding choice of groups for binary interaction coefficients are
slightly different in that groups may be specified down columns or along rows of the
lower half matrix but not both.
Note
Note that the mole weight and skewness variables apply on a sample-by-sample basis,
therefore there must be the appropriate number of measurements defined to allow this
option to be used.
Regression target
The regression target is the size of the objective function at which the regression terminates as
having achieved a match of calculated to observed values. Enter the regression target. The
default value is 0.000001.
Hint
Normally you do not need to change any of these limits, except for the maximum
number of iterations (which might be reduced, especially for larger problems) and the
limits on some variables (for example to prevent violation of monotonicity
relationships).
Note
For all variables specified in the regression the program displays the lower and upper
limits.
Reference section
Regression in PVTi
129
Variable
Lower limit
Upper limit
VAR1
VAR1lo
VAR1up
VAR2
VAR2lo
VAR2up
Note
For all the equation of state parameters, except the acentric factor and binaries, these
lower and upper limits are scaled (to unity) variables, with default settings of 0.5 and
1.5. That is, the program allows the variable to decrease/increase by up to 50% before
it terminates the regression.
Running a regression
Use this option to perform regression.
Note
This option is only available if you first define a set of experiments, observations and
variables.
Performing a regression
1
Hint
The results of regression can be viewed in the Sensitivity Analysis panel. See
"Regression Report" on page 130.
Regression Report
The regression report contains detail of the current fit between the model and the observations.
130
Reference section
Regression in PVTi
Also use this option to display the sensitivity matrix, that is the sensitivity of the programs
predictions to each of the given regression variables. This panel also gives detailed descriptions
of the current fit and the conditioning of the regression problem. All the information required to
develop a mathematically sound regression problem is available through this panel. The hints
provided in this section help you interpret the wealth of information contained within the folders
of this panel.
Hint
Details Folder
The first folder, Details, shows the current fit. The numbers at the top of the folder show the
Total (normalized) RMS fit and the Weighted (normalized) RMS fit.
Hint
The RMS values in PVTi are normalized (the difference between the observed and
calculated values is divided by the observed value) so that, for example, pressures
(which could be thousands of psi) are treated similarly to saturations (which are
between zero and one). To calculate the weighted RMS, each normalized difference is
multiplied by the assigned weighting. The default weight is 1 and so, initially, the two
RMS values are the same.
The remainder of this first folder shows the observations, their weighting in the regression, and
the percentage difference between the observed and calculated values.
Modifiers folder
The second folder, Modifiers, shows the selected regression parameters, the minimum and
maximum allowed values for each modifier, and the percentage change made to the modifier
during regression (initially this is zero as no regression has been run).
Sensitivities folder
The Sensitivities folder shows the sensitivity of each observation to changes in each regression
variable.
Hint
A large sensitivity indicates that changing that regression variable has a large effect on
the fit to that observation. Likewise, consider discarding regression variables to which
the observations are insensitive, since a large modifier is needed to obtain a fit and, in
general, large modifications lead to unrealistic fluid models.
Hessian folder
The Hessian matrix is a good indication of the conditioning of the inversion problem
(regression).
Hint
Reference section
Regression in PVTi
131
Covariance folder
The Covariance matrix shows the likely scale of variation in the regression variables that will
occur during regression. The larger a value, the less well-determined the value of the regression
variable will be.
Correlation folder
The Correlation matrix is very important as it can indicate links between regression variables
that are not obvious on first inspection. If two variables are strongly correlated (correlation close
to 1), they both move the fit in the same direction; and so changing one is similar, in effect, to
changing the other. If two regression variables are strongly anti-correlated, changing one has the
opposite effect to changing the other. This latter case can cause a difficulty in regression as the
two variables could be changed an unlimited amount in opposite directions without having a
noticeable effect on the fit.
Hint
132
Reference section
Regression in PVTi
Look at off-diagonal elements in the correlation matrix. If any are close to 1 or -1,
consider removing one of the two regression variables that are correlated. This
improves the likelihood of a good final fluid model being created.
(If the variables are of the same type, for example if they are both Tcrit, you could
consider combining them into a single regression variable.)
Exporting keywords
General information
PVTi can be used to generated output for ECLIPSE BlackOil, ECLIPSE Gi option, ECLIPSE
Compositional, ECLIPSE Thermal, VFPi and the API Tracking option in ECLIPSE BlackOil.
The Export modules are used to produce models for the ECLIPSE simulators (see "Output for
ECLIPSE simulators" on page 353 for background information). You can generate data files for
exporting to ECLIPSE BlackOil , ECLIPSE Compositional, ECLIPSE Thermal, API Tracking
and VFPi from PVTi.
To open this menu, select PVTi: File | Export.
The Export menu has the following options:
Oil reservoir...
See "Export Oil Reservoir" on page 135.
Gas reservoir...
See "Export Gas Reservoir" on page 136.
Equilibration...
See "Export Equilibration" on page 136
Water...
See "Export Water" on page 137.
VFPi
Use this option to generate VFPi tables. For further information see "VFP module" on
page 138.
Reference section
Exporting keywords
133
Hint
If you are going to use COMPVD (recommended), you do not want a ZI keyword, so set
the Sample to {none}
Reservoir temperature
This is exported in the RTEMP keyword.
Sample
The sample for which the keywords will be exported for.
Number of Flashes to be Performed
This number is used when calculating the coefficients of Crookstons equation. You an usually
leave this set as the default value of 20.
Max/Min Pressure/Temperature
You are recommended to enter the maximum and minimum values of pressure and temperature
for your reservoir.
Export Crookston Coefficients
If the box is ticked then the coefficients of Crookstons equation will be exported. If not then
Wilsons formula is used to calculate K-values.
Units
Allows you to export in the ECLIPSE unit set of choice.
A detailed explanation of the workflow required for this export option is described in the
"Compositional Data for ECLIPSE Thermal" on page 367. For a technical review of PVTis
export facility for ECLIPSE Thermal see "ECLIPSE Thermal Export Module" on page 401.
134
Reference section
Exporting keywords
Reference section
Exporting keywords
135
Separator experiment
If creating tables for ECLIPSE BlackOil, the output from the Constant Volume Depletion can
be passed through any separator. The default is to use a single stage at standard conditions (that
is, a stock-tank only).
Table generation method
See "Output for ECLIPSE simulators" on page 353.
Injection fluid
For the Gi option only, this provides the injection sample to be used in creating the pseudocompositional keywords. See "Pseudo-compositional tables for ECLIPSE GI option" on
page 361.
Export Equilibration
This panel exports keywords from a Composition versus Depth experiment.
The keywords are suitable for the ECLIPSE BlackOil INIT section and ECLIPSE
Compositional PROPS section.
Units
Allows you to export in the ECLIPSE unit set of choice.
Properties Keyword
This sets the keyword that are exported.
Hint
136
Reference section
Exporting keywords
Separator experiment
If creating tables for ECLIPSE BlackOil, the output from the Composition versus Depth
experiment can be passed through any separator. The default is to use a single stage at standard
conditions (that is, a stock-tank only).
Export Water
Description
This panel exports water properties.
The keyword PVTW or PVTWSALT can be exported for the ECLIPSE simulators. The keyword
Hint
All the keywords are described in the "ECLIPSE Reference Manual". WATPVT is
described in the "VFPi User Guide".
Units
Allows you to export in the ECLIPSE Unit set of choice.
Reservoir temperature
This sets the reservoir temperature to be used in generating the keywords.
Reservoir pressure
See above.
Dissolved natural gas
If this option is checked, the properties account for the presence of dissolved gas in the water.
Brine
If this option is checked, salt concentration(s) can be accounted for.
VFPi
If this option is checked, the exported keyword will be WATPVT. The low temperature and low
pressure fields become active, these values correspond to the lower values to be used in the flow
table (for example, the top of the pipe).
For more information see "Water properties" on page 362.
Reference section
Exporting keywords
137
VFP module
Introduction
The VFP module generates blackoil tables for VFPi. To open this menu, select PVTi: File |
Export | VFPi from the main PVTi window.
Figure 6.7 The VFP module
File
This option allows you to read and display data from the PVI file. For further information
see "File" on page 139.
Edit
This option allows you to add a new graph and copy items to the clipboard.
View
This option allows you to control the appearance of the plot workspace.
138
Define
Reference section
VFP module
This option allows you to define experiments and the method of calculation. For further
information see "Define" on page 141.
Generate
This option allows you to generate tables. For further information see "Generate" on
page 142.
Options
Allows the modification of the plot workspace.
Help
Gives you access to the on-line help for this module.
VFP toolbar
The module toolbar contains the following buttons:
Display section from PVI file. Use this option to display VFP sections from the PVI file.
For further information see "Display VFP section from PVI..." on page 140.
Read section from PVI file.
Use this option to load VFP sections from the PVI file. For further information see "Read
VFP section from PVI..." on page 140.
Experiments
Use this option to define VFP experiments. For further information see "Experiments..." on
page 141.
Generate.
Use this option to select the method of generation for the VFPi blackoil tables. For further
information see "Method" on page 142.
Simulate
Use this option to generate the tables. For further information see "Perform" on page 142.
View results
Use this option to review the tables.
View plots
Use this option to view plots of the tables. For further information see "Plot" on page 143.
File
Use this menu to read and display VFP sections from a PVI file.
The File menu has the following options:
Reference section
VFP module
139
Choose VFP | File | Read VFP section from PVI... and select the appropriate PVI file.
PVTi searches for the required file, and looks for all occurrences of the required section. If
it finds more than one section of the required type in the file, you must select which section
you wish to read. The program displays a prompt specifying the number of sections found.
Note
If the program does not find a VFP section in the PVI file it produces an error message
and stops processing.
Print preview
Previews the printed plot in the main module area.
Print layout
Allows you to set the text styles and sizes for printing.
Print setup
Sets up the printer specifications. This option is specific to Windows.
Print
Prints the whole module print area, the main window and allows you to set the print type, for
example color, postscript.
Close
Use this option to close the VFP module. To close the VFP module, select VFP | File | Close.
Note
140
Reference section
VFP module
The data is not lost. If you reselect the module all data that was previously set is
available.
Define
This menu allows you to set up experiments and the method of calculation. To open this menu,
select VFP | Define.
The Define menu has the following options:
Experiments...
Defines experiments. For further information see "Experiments..." on page 141.
Method...
Defines the method of calculation. For further information see "Method" on page 142.
Experiments...
Use this option to define experiments.
Defining experiments
1
Hint
The first temperature you give for the CCE should be the highest temperature in the
production string, which can safely be taken to be the reservoir temperature. The
second temperature you give should be the lowest temperature in the production string,
for example a sub-sea temperature of 4 C .
Note
You do not need to give a saturation pressure as the program gives this data. It also
calculates undersaturated properties for all pressures. See "Output for ECLIPSE
simulators" on page 353 for further details
Define the separator conditions that take the reservoir liquid and/or vapor to surface
conditions to define the various ratios in the blackoil tables.
Note
Note that to comply with the blackoil definition strictly, the last stage in the separator
train should be at standard conditions.
Specify the composition of the injection gas using one of the currently defined sample
mnemonics.
Give the gas-oil ratios in which the lean gas is to be added to the reservoir fluid.
Press OK.
Reference section
VFP module
141
Method
Use this option to select the method of calculation. You can choose from Coats, or Whitson and
Torp method. The default is the Whitson and Torp method
Generate
This menu allows you to generate blackoil tables for VFPi. To open this menu, select VFP |
Generate.
The Generate menu has the following options:
Perform
Generates the blackoil tables.
Perform
Use this option to generate blackoil tables.
Note
You must define a depletion experiment and the separator configuration (which only
need be a one stage default system to standard conditions) to generate the blackoil
tables.
Note
If the process is successful the program also writes the data to the PVO file which you
can add to an VFPi input file.
Note
Note each set of tables is repeated twice, for the set of pressure nodes defined on the
CCE experiment, at the specified high (reservoir) and low temperatures.
Water properties
1
142
Click Yes when asked if you wish to generate water properties, using the VFPi keyword
WATPVT.
Reference section
VFP module
This opens a a series of data entry panels where you can enter the data necessary for the inbuilt correlations to generate the appropriate data.
Plot
Use this option to produce plots.
Producing plots
1
oil viscosity o
gas viscosity g
oil Rs
Help menu
Gives access to help with PVTi.
Help
Opens the context-sensitive on-line help panel.
Reference section
VFP module
143
Utilities
Introduction
This menu allows you to change or redefine various program settings. It has the following
options:
Units...
This allows you to set unit types. For further information see "Units..." on page 144.
Standard Conditions...
This allows you to set the standard temperature and pressure. For further information see
"Standard conditions..." on page 145.
Program Option
This allows you to change the program options For further information see "Program
options" on page 145.
Debug...
This allows you to set the debug flags. For further information see "Debug..." on page 150.
Units...
This option allows you to select various unit types. You can:
Choose the temperature unit type; this can be different from the one selected by the above.
To define the units, select Utilities | Units. This opens the Set PVTi Unit Definitions panel.
Each unit type is selected by clicking on the corresponding radio button.
144
Reference section
Utilities
Standard conditions...
This option allows you to set the standard temperature and pressure.
Click on OK.
Program options
This option allows you to set various program options. Various options which cannot be set
elsewhere in PVTi have been collected together under this option.
1
Table 6.3
Program Option
Available choices
Sliq = Vliq/Vsat
Independent variables
Sliq = Vliq/Vtot
Dependent
Separator Conditions
Stock Tank Conditions
None
Linear expansion only
Polynomial correlations
user units
Katz-Firoozabadi
No Output of Values
No save to samples
Katz-Firoozabadi
Old PVTi Library
Output to Screen/PVP
No Output to Screen/PVP
Reference section
Utilities
145
Table 6.3
Program Option
Available choices
No Output to file
Output to Graf .VEC files
A4 format
132 characters wide
Normal
No Last Stage
Incremental
Volume of Oil at Pbub
All Data
Truncation at Saturation Pressure
Keep Fixed
Allow Change when Regressing
E300 Flash
Old PVTi Flash
Keep Fixed
Allow Change
Old Phase Plots
No
Yes
146
Reference section
Utilities
If you use the Independent option then you are allowed to regress on the volume shifts of the
components. PVTi also de-couples the dependence of the volume shifts on the critical
parameters so that a change in Tc, Pc, etc. does not effect a volume shift value.
1
Reference section
Utilities
147
Calculated compositions
Compositions calculated during an EoS simulation of an experiment can be saved to be used
later as samples for further experiments, phase plots, etc. This might be useful in swelling tests,
separator calculations or estimating the variation of composition with depth.
1
Component Library
This option allows you to specify the component library to use. The choice is between the KatzFiroozabadi and the Oil PVTi Library. The Katz-Firoozibadi is the default and recommended
choice.
Experiment compositions
This option allows you to turn off lengthy output to the print file of liquid and vapor
compositions calculated in experiments.
1
Switch off the output of the liquid and vapor compositions if they are not required.
PVTi prints the liquid and vapor compositions to the screen and PVP file, by default.
Experiment results
On definition of fluid properties, completion of experiments, etc., you can optionally choose to
write all the data to the PVP print file.
1
Plot vectors
For more advanced graphical manipulation of PVTi plots, you may choose to output data
vectors to a file in GRAF user vector format. The vectors are written when the plots are
performed.
1
148
Normal where the last stage to standard conditions is removed with the volume of gas being
normalized to the volume of oil at reservoir conditions
The GOR is defined in increments, that is, at each stage of the depletion process.
The GOR is the default GOR but normalized to the volume of oil at its bubble point
pressure rather than at STC.
Reference section
Utilities
See "Differential liberation" on page 339 for the precise definitions of these quantities.
1
Flash calculations
This option allows the Flash and Psat algorithms to be changed from the default ECLIPSE
Compositional algorithms to the old PVTi (pre-99B) algorithms.
1
Choose to use the old PVTi algorithms for Flash and Psat.
This option must be set in the ON state for you to use these regression variables. You
must have characterized and/or user components, or be mixing samples, for the
variables to become of use.
Reference section
Utilities
149
Choose to instruct PVTi to write out the extra keywords required for use in batch mode. By
default this option is disabled.
This option cannot be saved, which means every time you open a project it is disabled by
default. The reason for this is that when this option is enabled it writes many more keywords
than is necessary in interactive mode. You could easily forget that a project had this option
enabled when opening an existing project meaning that many more keywords than necessary
would continue to be written to the PVI file.
Debug...
This option sets the debug flags.
Note
This is a programmer test facility to request additional information from the program
at a debug level. You do not need to set one or more of the debug flags unless help is
required in tracing an apparent anomaly.
Monitor option
This is a programmer test facility to trace the root of a problem in the program at a subroutine
level.
Note
You do not need to need to set this flag ON unless asked to do so.
Window
This menu allows you to control the size and appearance of the program windows. To select this
menu, select Window from the main PVTi window.
Tile
This puts all the visible windows into a tiled formation.
Cascade
This puts all the visible windows into a cascade formation.
Minimize children
This option minimizes all windows except the main PVTi window.
Restore children
This opens all minimized windows so that they are visible.
Help
This menu gives you access to the help for PVTi. To select this menu, select Help from the main
PVTi window.
150
Reference section
Utilities
Help
This opens the on-line help panels.
ToolTips enabled
The ToolTips provide a single line of text about each toolbar button when the mouse pointer is
stationary over the icon. This option turns the ToolTips feature on and off.
Reference section
Utilities
151
General information
For the 2004A version of PVTi the batch mode has undergone a significant revamp. Over the
last few years the user interface of PVTi has evolved rapidly and many of the PVTi sections are
now no longer written out to the PVI file as they are no longer required when PVTi reads in a
file. For example a BLACKOIL section is no longer written out by PVTi when black oil tables
are exported using the user interface. Although they can be inserted into the file manually it was
felt that a more user friendly way of constructing the .PVI files containing all the appropriate
sections required for the batch mode was needed.
The next section outlines how it is now possible to perform a workflow interactively in order
for PVTi to be able to reproduce this workflow in batch mode at a later time.
The way in which you run a file in batch mode has also changed. Pre-2004A you had to enter
the keyword TESTCASE anywhere in the RUNSPEC section of the PVI file. You then launched
batch mode the command line, for example using $pvti filename (if using a PC).
This has changed for the 2004A release. It was felt that opening files and adding keywords and
then remembering to remove them at a later data was cumbersome. The new way to run in batch
mode is to launch PVTi from the command line and specify the word -batch before the
filename in the line command instruction.
Hint
To launch the file TEST.PVI to run in PVTis batch mode on a PC use the command
$pvti -batch TEST.PVI. On a UNIX machine @pvti -batch
TEST.PVI runs the file TEST.PVI in batch mode.
Sometimes users have more than 1 version of PVTi installed. It is also possible to specify which
version of PVTi to use on the command line using the -ver command.
Hint
152
On a PC, to specify the 2004A version of PVTi to run the file TEST.PVI in batch
mode, use the command $pvti -ver 2004a -batch TEST.PVI.
Reference section
Batch system and keywords
The workflow must be pre-defined. The batch mode is not designed to be able to
reproduce workflows where you have been experimenting with a particular project.
Start PVTi in interactive mode with the file that you eventually wish to run in batch mode.
Open the Options panel using the File | Utilities | Program | Options....
In PVTi 2004A a new option has been added at the bottom called Write Keywords for
Batch Mode. Select Yes and then close the panel.
Perform the required workflow and, when finished, save the file (but not concisely) using
the File | Save... option.
Note
The file must not be saved concisely as this would erase all the history in the .PVI file
that PVTi uses to reproduce your workflow in batch mode.
The final task is to actually run the file in batch mode. To do this on a PC launch PVTi from
the command line using the statement $pvti -batch filename where filename is
the name of your PVTi project, for example TEST.PVI.
Note
The word -batch can be put after or before the filename but it has to be somewhere
on the command line in order to tell PVTi to run in batch mode.
When you are running in batch mode the program automatically sends printed output such as
experiment simulation results to a print file with the same root name as the input .PVI file. For
example, if the input file is CRUDE.PVI, the print file is CRUDE.PVP. See "PVI file" on
page 155 for further information. In batch mode all the experiments are automatically simulated
in the project by default. If any regression is to be performed in the batch mode then the
experiment simulation is performed after this has been done.
If keywords are exported for ECLIPSE during the batch run then .PVO files are created as
normal, but they are named using a convention that is outlined in the next section.
A file is also created called BATCH_OUT.PVI. This is a saved version of your project after all
the steps in the workflow have been performed. It can be useful to have this file after the batch
run has finished if the fluid model has changed (for example during regression) in your project
during the course of the workflow
Reference section
Batch system and keywords
153
Regression
You are allowed a maximum of two REGRESS sections in the batch mode file. This is so that
regression on both special and normal variables is possible. Any further regression sections are
ignored by the batch mode.
Splitting/Grouping
You are allowed two GROUP sections and two SPLIT sections in the file. If there are REGRESS
sections then one SPLIT and one GROUP section is allowed before the first REGRESS section
and one SPLIT and one GROUP section is allowed after this REGRESS section.
Export
It is assumed that all exports would be performed at the end of the workflow. An unlimited
amount of export sections (such as BLACKOIL, OUTECL3 sections) are allowed as long as they
are after the last REGRESS section. Because multiple exporting is allowed a naming convention
has been invented to stop PVTi just writing each exported .PVO file over the top off the last one
that was written out.
The naming convention depends on what kind of export is being performed:
BLACKOIL
If a BLACKOIL section has been read in the .PVI file then the naming convention of the .PVO
file is filename_samplename_experimenttype_keyword1keyword2.PVO
where:
filename is the rootname of the project,
samplename is the sample name used for the export,
experimenttype is the type of depletion experiment used in the export,
keyword1 is the name of the first keyword exported
and keyword2 is the name of the second keyword exported.
For example if the file CRUDE.PVI was used to export sample ZI based on experiment DL1
using Live Oil and Dry Gas keywords then the name of the produced file would be
CRUDE_ZI_DLLIVEDRY.PVO.
OUTECL3
If an OUTECL3 section has been read in the .PVI file then the naming convention of the
outputted .PVO file is filename_samplename_FLUIDMODEL.PVO.
APITRACK
If an APITRACK section has been read in the .PVI file then the naming convention of the
outputted .PVO file is filename_experimenttype_APITRACK.PVO.
154
Reference section
Batch system and keywords
PVI file
The PVI file consists of a number of sections, each introduced by a section keyword.
The first section must be RUNSPEC, which specifies the number of components, the
equation of state option and the run title.
Other sections may be in arbitrary order, and may occur more than once.
Reference section
Batch system and keywords
155
Details
RUNSPEC
SYSTEM
SPLIT
GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
REGRESS
BLACKOIL
VFP
PSEUCOMP
OUTECL3
Keywords by section
Each of the main sections, for example the RUNSPEC section, has its own specific keywords.
Note the following:
The keywords UNITS, DEGREES and STCOND are normally be specified in the SYSTEM
section, but can occur elsewhere, and can occur more than once.
The keywords DEBUG and OPTIONS can be specified in the RUNSPEC section or in the
SYSTEM, COMB, SIMULATE or REGRESS sections.
The keyword MESSAGE can be specified anywhere, its function being merely to echo the
argument to the print file at the time of a batch run.
156
RUNSPEC keywords
Keyword
Comments
Details
EOS
LBC
Selects Lohrenz-Bray-Clark
viscosities.
NCOMPS
NEWPVI
Outputs a new PVI file at the end of the See "NEWPVI" on page 231
batch run.
PEDERSEN
Reference section
Batch system and keywords
Table 6.5
Keyword
Comments
Details
PRCORR
TITLE
ECHO
NOECHO
DEBUG
DEBUE
OPTIONS
VERSION
SYSTEM keywords
Keyword
Comments
Details
DEGREES
STCOND
UNITS
CNAMES
LNAMES
CHARACT
SCT
ACF
ACHEUH
BIC
CALVAL
DEFBIC
DREF
LBCCOEF
LBC
MW
OMEGAA
(optional).
Reference section
Batch system and keywords
157
Table 6.6
Keyword
Comments
Details
OMEGAB
(optional).
PARACHOR
Specifies parachors.
PCRIT
SPECHA,B,C,D
SSHIFT
TBOIL
TCRIT
THERMX
TREF
VCRIT
VCRITVIS
ZCRIT
ZCRITVIS
ZI
SAMPLES
SAMTITLE
Defines long titles for other samples. See "SAMTITLE" on page 257
HYDRO
Specifies hydrocarbon/Nonhydrocarbon.
SALINITY
MIX
158
SPLIT keywords
Keyword
Comments
Details
CORRACF
CORRCP
FRAC
Reference section
Batch system and keywords
Table 6.7
Keyword
Comments
Details
MDP
MWS
SG
SCT
WHIT
GROUP keywords
Keyword
Comments
Details
COMBINE
GRPBYSAM
GRPBYWGT
GRPBYMIX
GRPBYALL
COMB keywords
Keyword
Comments
Details
EXP
Defines experiments.
OBS
Defines observations.
OBSIND
COATS
PEARCE
WHITSON
RECOVERY
Reference section
Batch system and keywords
159
SIMULATE keywords
Keyword
Comments
Details
EXP
Defines experiments.
OBS
Defines observations.
OBSIND
FVFREF
SAVCOMP
160
REGRESS keywords
Keyword
Comments
Details
EXP
Defines experiments.
OBS
Defines observations.
OBSIND
Defines the weight for individual observations. See "OBSIND" on page 235
VAR
Defines variables.
FVFREF
Sets the reference values for FVF calculations. See "FVFREF" on page 204
FIT
Perform regression.
MAXIT
MAXSTEP
MINSTEP
REGTARG
Reference section
Batch system and keywords
BLACKOIL keywords
Keyword
Comments
Details
UNITS
See "UNITS" on
page 274
EXP
Defines experiments.
COATS
See "COATS" on
page 178
WHITSON
See "WHITSON" on
page 288
DIFFERENTIAL
See "DIFFERENTIAL"
on page 189
FRAGOR
See "FRAGOR" on
page 203
MOSES
See "MOSES" on
page 227
LIVEOIL
DEADOIL
See "DEADOIL" on
page 184
WETGAS
See "WETGAS" on
page 286
DEADGAS
See "DRYGAS" on
page 183
WAT100
See "WAT100" on
page 282
MINDELP
See "MINDELP" on
page 222
Reference section
Batch system and keywords
161
PSEUCOMP keywords
Keyword
Comments
Details
EXP
Defines experiments.
WAT200
MINELP
COATS
WHITSON
OUTECL3 keywords
Keyword
Comments
Details
UNITS
SAMPLE
RTEMP
NEWPVO
EOSOUT
WAT300
EXP
Defines experiments.
162
KVTABLE
XMFVP
YMFVP
ZMFVD
Reference section
Batch system and keywords
VFP keywords
Keywords
Comments
Details
EXP
Defines experiments.
See "COATS" on
page 178
WHITSON
See "WHITSON" on
page 288
WATVFP
See "WATVFP" on
page 285
TLOW
See "TLOW" on
page 272
APITRACK keywords
Keyword
Comments
Details
UNITS
EXP
Defines experiments.
SAMPLES
COATS
WHITSON
DIFFERENTIAL
See "DIFFERENTIAL" on
page 189
FRAGOR
MOSES
LIVEOIL
DEADOIL
Reference section
Batch system and keywords
163
Table 6.16
164
Keyword
Comments
Details
WETGAS
DRYGAS
ALLDRY
Reference section
Batch system and keywords
Error handling
Keyword errors
If an error occurs during keyword input, the program displays the offending line with ?
characters under the field that is causing difficulties.
The error numbers given by the program may be of two types:
Above 100
System data errors, usually caused by internal read operations used to convert a character
to its value.
Table 6.17
Error codes
Error code
Description
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Data read which is not of the type expected and which cannot be easily converted.
21
22
23
24
Reference section
Error handling
165
Table 6.17
166
Error code
Description
29
Previous data type of repeated field not compatible for current repeated data field.
30
31
Unable to convert current value due to error in previous repeated data field.
32
33
Reference section
Error handling
Keywords
Chapter 7
PVTi keywords
This chapter contains details of all the keywords in PVTi. The keywords are listed in
alphabetical order.
Keywords
PVTi keywords
167
Keywords A-D
This section contains the A-D keywords.
The other PVTi keywords are listed as follows:
"Keywords E-K" on page 191
"Keywords L- O" on page 213
"Keywords P- S" on page 241
"Keywords T - Z" on page 267.
168
Keywords
Keywords A-D
ACF
RUNSPEC
X SYSTEM
SPLIT
GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
REGRESS
BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
OUTECL3
VFP
Acentric factors
Specifies the acentric factors for the components in the system. The keyword is followed by N c
values, and terminated with a slash character (/), where N c is the number of components
specified in the RUNSPEC section.
Example
ACF
.22500
.20100
.34540
.57400
.80160
/
.40000E-01
.22230
.38610
.61270
.84160
.13000E-01
.25390
.42510
.64860
.88300
.98600E-01
.30070
.46220
.68550
.92410
.15240
.27420
.49840
.72460
1.0590
.18480
.30560
.53420
.76340
Keywords
ACF
169
ACHEUH
RUNSPEC
X SYSTEM
SPLIT
GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
REGRESS
BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
OUTECL3
VFP
Example
--Default value:ACHEUH
0.15 /
170
Keywords
ACHEUH
ALLDRY
RUNSPEC
SYSTEM
SPLIT
GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
REGRESS
BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
OUTECL3
VFP
X APITRACK
Keywords
ALLDRY
171
BIC
RUNSPEC
X SYSTEM
SPLIT
GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
REGRESS
BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
OUTECL3
VFP
Specifies binary interaction coefficients. There are two possible formats for this keyword.
First format
The keyword should be followed by up to ( N c -1) lines of data followed by a forward slash
character (/).
Each line should consist of three integers followed by the set of binary interaction
coefficients between two specified components, terminated with a forward slash character
(/). The first integer specifies the index of the first component and the second and third
integers the lower and upper indices of the other component.
Second format
The program uses this format when saving.
This format in effect displays the lower triangle of the BIC matrix, and there is no need for the
first three columns informing the program of the component and the lower and upper indices.
PVTi assumes the coefficients are read in as second, third component, etc., by row with the
columns as the first, etc., component.
Note
For both formats the interaction coefficient between any given component and itself
must be zero. PVTi always ensures that this is the case.
Examples
First format
Binary interaction coefficients for a six component system.
BIC
2 1
3 1
4 1
5 1
6 1
/
1 -0.02000
2 0.10000
2 0.13000
2 0.13500
5 0.12700
/
0.03600
0.05000
0.08000
2*
/
/
/
2*0.0600
Here there are zero binary interaction coefficients between components 4 to 3, 5 to 3,4 and 6 to
2,3.
172
Keywords
BIC
Second format
The same system of BICs appears as follows:
BIC
-0.02000
0.10000
0.13000
0.13500
0.12700
/
0.03600
0.05000
0.08000
2*
2*0.0600
Keywords
BIC
173
BLACKOIL
RUNSPEC
SYSTEM
SPLIT
GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
REGRESS
X BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
OUTECL3
VFP
174
Keywords
BLACKOIL
If present, this section must not appear before the SYSTEM section.
This section is used to generate blackoil tables for any of the currently defined fluid samples by
simulating reservoir depletion with a constant volume depletion or differential liberation. Tables
are generated that can then be input into ECLIPSE BlackOil.
CALVAL
RUNSPEC
X SYSTEM
SPLIT
GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
REGRESS
BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
OUTECL3
VFP
Example
For a two component C1/I-C4 system, using PVT-Metric units:
-- Calorific Values kJ/kgmol
CALVAL
8.130000000E+02
2.659000000E+03
Keywords
CALVAL
175
CHARACT
RUNSPEC
X SYSTEM
SPLIT
GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
REGRESS
BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
OUTECL3
VFP
Components to be characterized
Specifies the components that are to be defined by characterization. This keyword is followed
by up to N c lines (or as many non-blank components as in the CNAMES keyword, below), each
terminated with a / character. The last line of data is followed by a / character.
Each line begins with the mnemonic of the component to be characterized, followed by five
items of data:
Molecular weight M w
Specific gravity S g
Critical properties.
Kesler-Lee (K), Cavett (C), Riazi-Daubert (R), Winn (W) or Pedersen (P)
Acentric factor.
Kesler-Lee (K), Edmister (E), Thompson (T) or Pedersen (P).
Generally, you must provide two out of the four data items M w , S g , T b and K w to characterize
a component. If more than two items are available, give the best two items since the order of
entry dictates which two are used. It is possible to perform a characterization with a minimum
data entry of M w ; the program estimates the specific gravity from a Single Carbon Number
(SCN) table look-up. See [Ref. 18].
Note
Example
Characterizes two plus fractions, the first of which has known specific gravity and normal
boiling point temperature, the second of which has only molecular weight. Riazi-Daubert
critical properties and Edmister acentric factor correlations to be used:
CHARACT
C7+1 1*
C7+2 200.0
/
0.7500
/
390.0
2*
If more than two of the four items, M w , S g , T b and K w are available, then the program uses the
first two, that is given data for M w , T b and K w , then PVTi uses M w and T b .
176
Keywords
CHARACT
CNAMES
RUNSPEC
X SYSTEM
SPLIT
GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
REGRESS
BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
OUTECL3
VFP
Component names
Specifies the mnemonics associated with the components in the system that are either to be
characterized or fully user defined. This keyword is followed by N c component names, where
Nc
character.
Define library components using the LNAMES keyword. Any system containing both library and
characterisation/user defined components should contain both LNAMES and CNAMES with the
default specification 1*, where appropriate.
The program translates the component names into upper case on input. The length may be up to
72 characters, but a limit of four is suggested to fit into the program output formats.
Example
For a nine-component condensate system, the first five being from library, the last four to be
user defined:
CNAMES
5*
LNAMES
CO2 N2
C2
C3 4*
Keywords
CNAMES
177
Blackoil tables
COATS
X
X
X
RUNSPEC
SYSTEM
SPLIT
GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
REGRESS
BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
OUTECL3
VFP
178
Keywords
COATS
Specifies that the Coats method for the generation of blackoil tables is used in preference to the
Whitson and Torp method. By default, the program uses the Whitson and Torp method.
The keyword COATS has no arguments.
COMB
RUNSPEC
SYSTEM
SPLIT
GROUP
X COMB
SIMULATE
REGRESS
BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
OUTECL3
VFP
If present, this section must not appear before the SYSTEM section.
This section is used for data and consistency checking of laboratory data of gas condensates and
volatile oils. Material balance is performed on any Constant Volume Depletion data, to calculate
liquid compositions, K-values, densities, etc. Additionally, tests of separator recombination data
are available, as well as estimates of recovery, and generation of blackoil tables without
recourse to the equation of state.
Keywords
COMB
179
COMBINE
RUNSPEC
SYSTEM
SPLIT
X GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
REGRESS
BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
OUTECL3
VFP
The group index has no significance other than to identify sets of components.
You may enter a name for the new fractions. By default the program uses GRP1, GRP2 and
GRP3 as the group names.
The form of the keyword is:
COMBINE
icl1 icu1 ifr1 zfr1
icl2 icu2 ifr2 zfr2
/
/
/
where:
Example
In a 19-component system, group the components 10 to 14 inclusive, and the components 15,
17 and 18. Accept default names for the fractions:
COMBINE
10 14 1
15 15 2
17 18 2
/
180
Keywords
COMBINE
/
/
/
CORRACF
RUNSPEC
SYSTEM
X SPLIT
GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
REGRESS
BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
OUTECL3
VFP
Example
Edmister correlation required:
CORRACF
E /
Keywords
CORRACF
181
CORRCP
RUNSPEC
SYSTEM
X SPLIT
GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
REGRESS
BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
OUTECL3
VFP
Example
Cavett correlation required:
CORRCP
C /
182
Keywords
CORRCP
DRYGAS
RUNSPEC
SYSTEM
SPLIT
GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
REGRESS
X BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
OUTECL3
VFP
X APITRACK
Keywords
DRYGAS
183
DEADOIL
RUNSPEC
SYSTEM
SPLIT
GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
REGRESS
X BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
OUTECL3
VFP
X APITRACK
184
Keywords
DEADOIL
DEBUE
X RUNSPEC
SYSTEM
SPLIT
GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
REGRESS
BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
OUTECL3
VFP
Output indices
Index
Output from
No debug
Newton routines
p sat routines
Example
Request debug from Newton and p sat routines:
CORRCP
C /
Keywords
DEBUE
185
DEBUG
X RUNSPEC
SYSTEM
SPLIT
GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
REGRESS
BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
OUTECL3
VFP
Requests that additional output from PVTi be directed to the DBG debug file. The keyword is
followed by up to 16 integers in the range one to 16, terminated with a forward slash (/)
character. The indices request the following output:
Table 7.2
Output indices
Index
Output from
Phase plots
Regression
Parser
Characterization/Splitting
Observations
Saturation pressure/temperature
10
Flash routine
11
Newton routines
12
13
Stability Check/Michelsen
14
Opening/closing of files
15
Regression output
16
17
COMB routines
Example
Request debug from Flash and Michelsen routines only:
DEBUG
9* 10 2* 13 /
186
Keywords
DEBUG
DEFBIC
RUNSPEC
X SYSTEM
SPLIT
GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
REGRESS
BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
OUTECL3
VFP
Keywords
DEFBIC
187
DEGREES
RUNSPEC
X SYSTEM
SPLIT
GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
REGRESS
BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
OUTECL3
VFP
Temperature convention
Specifies the temperature convention to use. The keyword is followed by a character string
identifying the convention, which may be one of the following four:
KELVIN
Degrees Kelvin
CELSIUS
Degrees Celsius
RANKINE
Degrees Rankine
FAHRENHEIT
Degrees Fahrenheit.
Only the first character is significant, and may be lower or upper case. The default temperature
convention is degrees Kelvin.
Note
Example
Set to degrees Fahrenheit:
DEGREES
F /
188
Keywords
DEGREES
DIFFERENTIAL
RUNSPEC
SYSTEM
SPLIT
GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
REGRESS
X BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
OUTECL3
VFP
Blackoil tables
Specifies that differential black oil tables are generated. By default, the Whitson and Torp
method of composite black oil table generation is used.
The keyword DIFFERENTIAL has no arguments.
Keywords
DIFFERENTIAL
189
Reference densities
DREF
RUNSPEC
X SYSTEM
SPLIT
GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
REGRESS
BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
OUTECL3
VFP
Specifies the reference densities for the components in the system. The keyword is followed by
N c values, and terminated with a forward slash (/) character, where N c is the number of
components specified in the RUNSPEC section.
Note
Note
Example
For a two-component CO2/I-C4 system:
DREF
777.00
190
Keywords
DREF
557.00
Keywords E-K
This section contains the E-K keywords.
The other PVTi keywords are listed as follows:
"Keywords A-D" on page 168
"Keywords L- O" on page 213
"Keywords P- S" on page 241
"Keywords T - Z" on page 267.
Keywords
Keywords E-K
191
ECHO
X RUNSPEC
SYSTEM
SPLIT
GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
REGRESS
BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
OUTECL3
VFP
192
Keywords
ECHO
This keyword inserts the PVI input file into the PVP print file.
The keyword ECHO has no arguments.
EOS
X RUNSPEC
SYSTEM
SPLIT
GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
REGRESS
BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
OUTECL3
VFP
PR Two-parameter Peng-Robinson.
RK Redlich-Kwong.
SRK Soave-Redlich-Kwong.
SW Schmidt-Wenzel.
ZJ Zudkevitch-Joffe.
Example
EOS
PR3
Keywords
EOS
193
EOSOUT
RUNSPEC
SYSTEM
SPLIT
GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
REGRESS
BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
X OUTECL3
VFP
194
Keywords
EOSOUT
EXP
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
RUNSPEC
SYSTEM
SPLIT
GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
REGRESS
BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
OUTECL3
VFP
Experiments
Specifies the experiments to be performed. Up to 100 experiments plus one set of BLACKOIL
calculations can be defined.
The form of the keyword and associated data is:
EXP
<no>1
<no>2
:
<samp>1
<samp>2
<type>1
<type>2
<data>1
<data>2
/
/
where:
<samp> specifies the mnemonic of the required sample composition for this experiment;
<type> specifies the experiment type. One of: FLASH, BUBBLE, DEW, CCE, CVD, DL,
SWELL, SEPS, COMPG, TERN, vapor, MFLASH, CRIT, TSAT, FCMP, MCMP, PSAT, MCT.
In the above, a forward slash (/) character terminates entry of experiments, and the form of the
<data> depends on the particular experiment type:
Table 7.3
Experiment Data
FLASH
BUBBLE
DEW
IRT
P
T
CCE
FLUID
P2...
...PN
CVD
FLUID
P1
P2...
...PN
DL
P2...
...PN
SWELL
FLUID
YMF
[PRESS P]
STYPE
X1...
...XN
SEPS
T1
P1
L1
V1
(option 1)
T2
P2
L2
V2
TN
PN
LN
VN
SEPS
T1
P1
FL11
FV11
FV1N
(option 2)
T2
P2
FL21
FV21...FL2N
FV2N
TN
PN
LN
FVN1...FLNN FVNN
COMPG
FLUID
D1
TERN
ZG1
ZG2
ZG3
IG2...
...IGN
T
M1... ...MN
VAPOR
FLUID
YMF
MFLASH
IG1
CRIT
Keywords
EXP
195
Table 7.3
Experiment Data
TSAT
TSAT
FCMP
YMF
MCMP
YMF
ICORV
PSAT
MCT
YMF
FCMP
T
MCMP
PSAT
ICORV
FL2...FLN-1N
(option 1)
MCT
MCT
(option
1)
YMF
ICORV
FV2...FVN-1N
(option 2)
MCT
(option
2)
TCLOUD
PCLOUD
where:
Table 7.4
Keyword arguments
Keyword
arguments
Data requirements
IRT
FLUID
PI
Ith pressure
YMF
STYPE
ICORV
XI
MI
TI
LI
VI
196
Keywords
EXP
FLIJ
Fraction of liquid output from stage I to stage J. Default is 1.0 to the next
stage.
FVIJ
Reference depth.
Table 7.4
Keyword
arguments
Data requirements
DI
Depth I.
ZGI
IGI
Example
Consider the following experiments:
1
Swelling test at 200 F , injection gas composition specified in SAMPLES with mnemonic
ZINJ, four stage addition with given mole percentage of gas in reservoir fluid;
2-stage separator at 500 psi, 125 F and 50 psi, 90 F with second stage fed from liquid
output of stage one;
Composition with depth: a volatile oil (OIL) at reference conditions of 220 F , 4000 psi and
7500 ft. Require compositions and pressures at 7000, 7100,..., 8000 ft;
10 Multiple contact miscibility pressure at 160 F on ZI, injecting ZINJ, vaporizing drive;
11 Multiple contact miscibility pressure at 160 F on ZI, injecting ZINJ, condensing drive;
12 Multiple contact test at 121.1 F and 2738 psi on ZI, injecting ZINJ, condensing drive. At
each stage all of the remaining oil from the flash is contacted with one mole of ZINJ.
Keywords
EXP
197
EXP
1 ZI
2 ZI
DEW
SWELL
1
GAS
200.0
ZINJ
/
200.0
ZI
CCE
GAS
MOLE
200.0
0.1271
6000.0
0.3046
5000.0
0.5384
4000.0
0.6538
3000.0
ZI
CVD
GAS
200.0
2000.0
3000.0
1000.0
2400.0
1800.0
1200.0
500.0
50.0
90.0
7
8
9
10
11
12
ZI
ZI
ZI
ZI
ZI
ZI
TERN
N2C1
TERN /
FCMP ZINJ
MCMP ZINJ
MCMP ZINJ
MCT
ZINJ
C2C5
C6+
160.00 /
1 160.00
0 160.00
0 121.10
/
/
/
1 1 2 2 2 2 3 3
/
/
2738.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
Note
At pressures above the saturation pressure where no compositional changes take place,
the Constant Volume Depletion (CVD) and the Differential Liberation (DL) are
effectively a Constant Composition Expansion (CCE) experiment.
Restrictions
The EXP keyword arguments are subject to restrictions in the BLACKOIL, COMB, OUTECL3,
REGRESS and VFP sections:
Table 7.5
Section
Experiment
BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
COMB
OUTECL3
REGRESS
VFP
BLACKOIL section
In the BLACKOIL section, to generate blackoil tables you must define a depletion experiment
and a separator network.
Number these experiments; 1 (CVD or DL) and 2 (SEPS).
198
Keywords
EXP
COMB section
In the COMB section, you are restricted to the above experiments for the material balance (CVD),
recombination of separator data (SEPS) and recovery calculations (CCE).
Number these experiments 1 to 3, in any order.
OUTECL3 section
In the OUTECL3 section, you are restricted to a CVD for the purposes of generating either
KVTABLE or XMFVP and YMFVP tabular data.
Note
Only two pressures should be entered, the maximum and minimum pressures required
in the table. The other pressures are calculated by interpolation (up to 50 pressures in
all).
You can also specify a COMPG experiment for the purpose of generating ZMFVD tables for
ECLIPSE Compositional.
Note
Only two depths should be entered, the maximum and minimum depths required in the
table. The other depths are calculated by interpolation (up to 50 depths in all).
VFP section
In the VFP section, to generate blackoil tables you must define a depletion experiment and a
separator network.
Number these experiments 1 (CCE) and 2 (SEPS).
Keywords
EXP
199
EXPIND
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
RUNSPEC
SYSTEM
SPLIT
GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
REGRESS
BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
OUTECL3
VFP
Example
We have 20 experiments in total in our project and wish that they all be turned on during
regression except the 5th, 10th, 14th, 16th and 18th, which will be turned off:
OPTIONS
1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1/
200
Keywords
EXPIND
FIT
RUNSPEC
SYSTEM
SPLIT
GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
X REGRESS
BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
OUTECL3
VFP
Keywords
FIT
201
FRAC
RUNSPEC
SYSTEM
X SPLIT
GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
REGRESS
BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
OUTECL3
VFP
Specifies the number and relative compositions of the plus fraction splitting. You specify the
number of fractions required, the relative composition of the fractions, and the mnemonics to
be associated with the split fractions (optional), terminated with a / character.
Example
Split the plus fraction into three sub-fractions:
FRAC
3 0.72
202
Keywords
FRAC
0.23
0.05
C7+1
C7+2
C7+3
FRAGOR
RUNSPEC
SYSTEM
SPLIT
GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
REGRESS
X BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
OUTECL3
VFP
Blackoil tables
Specifies that the Fragor method for the generation of composite from differential blackoil
tables is used.
By default, the program uses the Whitson and Torp method of composite black oil table
generation.
The keyword FRAGOR has no arguments.
Keywords
FRAGOR
203
FVFREF
RUNSPEC
SYSTEM
SPLIT
GROUP
COMB
X SIMULATE
X REGRESS
BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
OUTECL3
VFP
If reference conditions are not entered for a SEP experiment, no FVFs are calculated
for that experiment. This includes the FVFs at each stage, and the ORELV mnemonic,
as well as SRELV.
Example
FVFREF
2 220.0
4 200.0
7 210.0
/
204
Keywords
FVFREF
4000.0
0.0 /
/
GI
RUNSPEC
SYSTEM
SPLIT
GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
REGRESS
BLACKOIL
X PSEUCOMP
OUTECL3
VFP
Example
Inject sample ZINJ at GIs of 0.1, 0.2, 0.3 mscf/rb:
GI
ZINJ
0.1
0.2
0.3
Keywords
GI
205
GROUP
RUNSPEC
SYSTEM
X SPLIT
GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
REGRESS
BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
OUTECL3
VFP
206
Keywords
GROUP
If present, this section must not appear before the SYSTEM section.
This section is used to define data necessary for the grouping of components into pseudocomponents.
GRBYALL
RUNSPEC
SYSTEM
SPLIT
X GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
REGRESS
BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
OUTECL3
VFP
Keywords
GRBYALL
207
GRBYMIX
RUNSPEC
SYSTEM
SPLIT
X GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
REGRESS
BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
OUTECL3
VFP
208
Keywords
GRBYMIX
GRBYSAM
RUNSPEC
SYSTEM
SPLIT
X GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
REGRESS
BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
OUTECL3
VFP
Example
Group to sample ZINJ
GRPBYSAM
ZINJ
/
Keywords
GRBYSAM
209
GRPBYWGT
RUNSPEC
SYSTEM
SPLIT
X GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
REGRESS
BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
OUTECL3
VFP
210
Keywords
GRPBYWGT
HYDRO
RUNSPEC
X SYSTEM
SPLIT
GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
REGRESS
BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
OUTECL3
VFP
Component Types
Type
Flag in HYDRO
Non-hydrocarbon
Hydrocarbon
Paraffin
Cyclic-hydrocarbon (naphthalene)
Aromatic
By default, all components are assumed to be hydrocarbons, except for specific nonhydrocarbons in the LIB set, that is, CO2 , H 2 S , H2 O , N2 , H2 and CO .
Example
An 11 component system consisting of CO2, N2, C1, C2, C3, IC4, NC4, IC5, NC5, C6, C7+:
HYDRO
N N 9*H
Keywords
HYDRO
211
KVTABLE
RUNSPEC
SYSTEM
SPLIT
GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
REGRESS
BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
X OUTECL3
VFP
212
Keywords
KVTABLE
Your must also define a Constant Volume Depletion (CVD) experiment with the EXP
keyword and associated data in order that the KVTABLE can be generated.
Note, also, that only two pressures need be defined in the CVD; these should be the
maximum and minimum required.
Keywords L- O
This section contains the L-O keywords.
The other PVTi keywords are listed as follows:
"Keywords A-D" on page 168
"Keywords E-K" on page 191
"Keywords P- S" on page 241
"Keywords T - Z" on page 267.
Keywords
Keywords L- O
213
Lohrenz-Bray-Clark viscosities
LBC
X RUNSPEC
SYSTEM
SPLIT
GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
REGRESS
BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
OUTECL3
VFP
214
Keywords
LBC
Specifies that the Lohrenz-Bray-Clark viscosity correlation is to be used, rather than the
Pedersen method. The LBC correlation is the default and is used if neither of the LBC or
PEDERSEN keywords is used.
The keyword LBC has no arguments.
LBCCOEF
RUNSPEC
X SYSTEM
SPLIT
GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
REGRESS
BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
OUTECL3
VFP
Example
Reset two of the LBC coefficients
LBCCOEF
1*
Keywords
LBCCOEF
215
LIVEOIL
RUNSPEC
SYSTEM
SPLIT
GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
REGRESS
X BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
OUTECL3
VFP
X APITRACK
216
Keywords
LIVEOIL
LNAMES
RUNSPEC
X SYSTEM
SPLIT
GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
REGRESS
BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
OUTECL3
VFP
Example
For a nine-component condensate system, with the first five from library and the last four userdefined:
CNAMES
5* C4-6 C7+1 C7+2 C7+3 /
LNAMES
CO2 N2
C1
C2
C3 4*
Keywords
LNAMES
217
MAXIT
RUNSPEC
SYSTEM
SPLIT
GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
X REGRESS
BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
OUTECL3
VFP
Specifies maximum number of function evaluations in the non-linear regression step. This does
not include the initial stage required in setting up the numerical Jacobian.
The default is 50.
The record is terminated with a slash (/).
Example
MAXIT
40 /
218
Keywords
MAXIT
MAXSTEP
RUNSPEC
SYSTEM
SPLIT
GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
X REGRESS
BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
OUTECL3
VFP
Example
MAXSTEP
0.2 /
Keywords
MAXSTEP
219
MDP
RUNSPEC
SYSTEM
X SPLIT
GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
REGRESS
BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
OUTECL3
VFP
Specifies the (shape factor) and (lowest mole weight) parameters used in the Whitson
probability density function used to characterize plus fractions.
Default values are 1.0 and 97.0 respectively.
The record is terminated with a slash (/).
Example
Change to 92.0, leave unchanged:
MDP
1* 92.0
220
Keywords
MDP
MESSAGE
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
RUNSPEC
SYSTEM
SPLIT
GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
REGRESS
BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
OUTECL3
VFP
Example
MESSAGE
Message to echo goes here
Keywords
MESSAGE
221
MINDELP
RUNSPEC
SYSTEM
SPLIT
GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
REGRESS
X BLACKOIL
X PSEUCOMP
OUTECL3
VFP
This keyword must be placed after the keywords defining the depletion and separator
experiments.
Example
MINDELP
14.7 /
222
Keywords
MINDELP
MINSTEP
RUNSPEC
SYSTEM
SPLIT
GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
X REGRESS
BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
OUTECL3
VFP
If the step size limit falls below a minimum value, for any reason, the regression terminates, as
further progress is unlikely to be made. This minimum value may be reset with the MINSTEP
keyword.
Note
This is not the minimum step that may be taken; it is the minimum upper limit imposed
on a step.
Example
MINSTEP
0.000001
Keywords
MINSTEP
223
Mix samples
MIX
RUNSPEC
X SYSTEM
SPLIT
GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
REGRESS
BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
OUTECL3
VFP
This keyword allows two samples to be mixed to form a new one. The inputs are the two sample
names, the new sample name, the type of mixing and the amount of mixing. The types of mixes
are as follows:
MOL specifies that the mixing amount given is the mole fraction of sample two in the
mixture with sample 1.
If the mixing method is GOR, then the amount is given as the gas volume at standard
conditions of sample two as a ratio of the volume of the initial sample. The latter is useful
for consideration of mixing of lean gases in oil samples.
Note
For the GOR option, the volume of the initial sample is usually the volume at its P sat at
the specified temperature. However, an alternative pressure can be specified; this is shown
in Example 2, below.
Examples
Example 1
Mix sample Z1 with Z2 to form Z3. The amount to mix is such that sample Z2 is 0.45 of the
mole fraction in the new sample Z3.
MIX
Z1
/
Z2
Z3
80.000 MOL
0.45
Example 2
Mix sample T1 with T2 to form T3. The amount to mix is represented as a GOR of 5.0 MSCF/
stb, and the volume of the first sample T1 is measured at a pressure of 5000 PSI at the mix
temperature of 670 F . If the saturated volume of T1 was required then the PRES could be set
as 0.0, or those two items removed from the keyword.
MIX
T1
/
224
Keywords
MIX
T2
T3
670.0
PRES 5000.0
GOR 5.0 /
MODSPEC
x RUNSPEC
SYSTEM
SPLIT
GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
REGRESS
BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
OUTECL3
VFP
Keywords
MODSPEC
225
MODSYS
RUNSPEC
X SYSTEM
SPLIT
GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
REGRESS
BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
OUTECL3
VFP
226
Keywords
MODSYS
MOSES
RUNSPEC
SYSTEM
SPLIT
GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
REGRESS
X BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
OUTECL3
VFP
Blackoil tables
Specifies that the Moses method for the generation of composite from differential blackoil
tables is used. By default, the program uses the Whitson and Torp method of composite black
oil table generation.
The keyword MOSES has no arguments.
Keywords
MOSES
227
MW
RUNSPEC
X SYSTEM
SPLIT
GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
REGRESS
BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
OUTECL3
VFP
Specifies the molecular weights for the components in the system. The keyword is followed by
N c values, where N c is the number of components specified in the RUNSPEC section.
The set of records must be terminated with a forward slash (/) character.
Example
Molecular weights for 15-component system:
MW
44.010
58.124
209.26
228
Keywords
MW
28.013
72.151
281.29
16.043
72.151
462.30
30.070
86.178
44.097
106.09
58.124
152.68
MWS
RUNSPEC
SYSTEM
X SPLIT
GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
REGRESS
BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
OUTECL3
VFP
Example
Plus fraction mole weight of 140.0:
MWS
140.0
Keywords
MWS
229
NCOMPS
X RUNSPEC
SYSTEM
SPLIT
GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
REGRESS
BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
OUTECL3
VFP
230
Keywords
NCOMPS
Example
NCOMPS
20 /
NEWPVI
X RUNSPEC
SYSTEM
SPLIT
GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
REGRESS
BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
OUTECL3
VFP
Example
Write out new PVI file with name SAVE:
NEWPVI
SAVE /
Keywords
NEWPVI
231
NEWPVO
RUNSPEC
SYSTEM
SPLIT
GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
REGRESS
BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
X OUTECL3
VFP
Example
Write a PVO file with name SAVE:
NEWPVO
SAVE /
232
Keywords
NEWPVO
NOECHO
X RUNSPEC
SYSTEM
SPLIT
GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
REGRESS
BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
OUTECL3
VFP
Keywords
NOECHO
233
OBS
Specify observations
RUNSPEC
SYSTEM
SPLIT
GROUP
X COMB
X SIMULATE
X REGRESS
BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
OUTECL3
VFP
This keyword can only be specified if the EXP keyword and associated experiments
have already been defined.
In the SIMULATE section, this keyword provides the means of supplying experimentally
determined data for comparison purposes in output.
In the REGRESS section, this keyword provides the experimental data to be regressed
against.
mnem
mnem
no
mnem
mnem
weight
weight
data
data
/
/
:
/
weight
weight
data /
data
:
/
/
where:
no
mnem
weight
Several observations can be associated with a given experiment, each of which must be
terminated with a forward slash (/) character. The entry of observations for a particular
experiment is then terminated with a forward slash (/) character. A forward slash character (/)
also terminates the entry of all observations.
234
Keywords
OBS
OBSIND
RUNSPEC
SYSTEM
SPLIT
GROUP
X COMB
X SIMULATE
X REGRESS
BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
OUTECL3
VFP
Note that the OBS keyword must exist in the section of the PVI file before the OBSIND
keyword is inserted.
If no OBSIND keyword is used the individual observation weights take the value of the global
observation weight defined for each mnemonic in OBS.
The form of the keyword and its associated data is:
OBSIND
no
mnem
mnem
:
data
data
/
/
data
data
/
/
/
no
mnem
mnem
:
/
/
where:
no
specifies the experiment number given in the EXP keyword ("EXP" on page 195);
mnem
specifies the observation mnemonic (see OBS keyword, "OBS" on page 234);
data
individual weights to be given to each point described in the previous OBS keyword.
Example
Observation weights for the experiments defined for the EXP keyword
(compare with example in OBS keyword description):
1
Saturation pressure and swelling factor (relative volume) at each stage of swelling test
Relative volumes at each stage of CCE, vapor Z -factors at pressures above saturation
pressure only
Liquid saturation, vapor Z -factor and gas mole fractions at each stage of CVD (nine
component system)
GOR at each stage and stock tank GOR (in Mscf/stb) from two stage separators.
Keywords
OBSIND
235
OBSIND
1 PSAT 50.0
ZV
1.0
/
/
/
2 PSAT 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0
RELV
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
/
/
/
3 RELV
ZV
/
4 SL
ZV
YMF
/
5 GOR
TGOR
100.0 10.0
10.0
/
/
236
Keywords
OBSIND
These keywords specify non-default a and b values for the components in the system. Each
keyword is followed by Nc values, where N c is the number of components in the system, and
is terminated with a forward slash (/) character. You need only specify these keywords if you
wish to override the default equation of state values, which are as follows:
Table 7.7
Equation
OMEGAA
OMEGAB
RK
0.4274802
0.08664035
SRK
0.4274802
0.08664035
ZJ
0.4274802
0.08664035
PR
0.457235529
0.07776074
Example
a
OMEGAA
0.457
0.456
OMEGAB
0.0780
0.0781
Keywords
OMEGAA/B
237
OPTIONS
X RUNSPEC
SYSTEM
SPLIT
GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
REGRESS
BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
OUTECL3
VFP
Upon program start-up, most options are OFF, specified by an option value 0 (zero).
Options 2 and 7 are the only ones that are on (=1) by default.
To subsequently turn any option ON, specify an the integer 1 (but be careful of the special
options below). The vector of integers is terminated with a / character.
0 - No temperature dependence;
Option 11
Optional printing of results to the PVP file also takes specific arguments:
0 - ALways print;
2 - NEVer print.
Option 14
Alternative definitions of GOR in differential liberation experiments also takes specific
arguments:
238
Keywords
OPTIONS
0 - Default definition;
1 - Last stage removed and oil volume at its bubble point pressure;
2 - Incremental GOR;
3 - As default but volume of oil at its bubble point pressure rather than stock tank
conditions.
Example
Separator liquid volumes to be output at stock tank conditions. Cheuh-Prausnitz BICs required.
Optional printing of results to PVP file:
OPTIONS
0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 /
Keywords
OPTIONS
239
OUTECL3
RUNSPEC
SYSTEM
SPLIT
GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
REGRESS
BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
X OUTECL3
VFP
240
Keywords
OUTECL3
If present, this section must not appear before the SYSTEM section.
The section is used in generating output data for inclusion into the ECLIPSE compositional
model. Either equation of state or pressure-dependent tabular data can be generated.
Keywords P- S
This section contains the P-S keywords.
The other PVTi keywords are listed as follows:
"Keywords A-D" on page 168
"Keywords E-K" on page 191
"Keywords L- O" on page 213
"Keywords T - Z" on page 267.
Keywords
Keywords P- S
241
PARACHOR
RUNSPEC
X SYSTEM
SPLIT
GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
REGRESS
BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
OUTECL3
VFP
Define parachors
Specifies the parachors for the components in the fluid system. The keyword is followed by up
to N c values (the number of components specified in the RUNSPEC section) and terminated by
a forward slash (/) character.
Units
Should be consistent to obtain surface tensions in dyne/cm.
Example
Parachors from [Ref. 18] for N2, C1, C2 and C3:
PARACHOR
41.0 77.0 108.0 150.3 /
242
Keywords
PARACHOR
PCRIT
RUNSPEC
X SYSTEM
SPLIT
GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
REGRESS
BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
OUTECL3
VFP
Critical pressures
Specifies the critical pressures for the components in the system. The keyword is followed by
N c (the number of components in the system) values, and terminated with a forward slash (/)
character.
Example
For a two-component system, using atm:
PCRIT
72.90
36.00
Keywords
PCRIT
243
PEARCE
RUNSPEC
SYSTEM
SPLIT
GROUP
X COMB
SIMULATE
REGRESS
BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
OUTECL3
VFP
244
Keywords
PEARCE
Blackoil tables
Specifies that the Pearce method for generating blackoil tables is used in preference to the
Whitson and Torp or Coats method. By default, the program uses the Whitson and Torp method.
The keyword PEARCE has no arguments.
PEDERSEN
X RUNSPEC
SYSTEM
SPLIT
GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
REGRESS
BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
OUTECL3
VFP
Keywords
PEDERSEN
245
PRCORR
X RUNSPEC
SYSTEM
SPLIT
GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
REGRESS
BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
OUTECL3
VFP
246
Keywords
PRCORR
Peng-Robinson correction
This keyword requests that a modified form of Peng-Robinson equation of state is to be used.
This changes the usual form of the a value as a function of the component acentric factor.
The keyword PRCORR takes no arguments, and has no effect on equations of state other than
the Peng-Robinson.
PSEUCOMP
RUNSPEC
SYSTEM
SPLIT
GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
REGRESS
BLACKOIL
X PSEUCOMP
OUTECL3
VFP
Keywords
PSEUCOMP
247
RECOVERY
RUNSPEC
SYSTEM
SPLIT
GROUP
X COMB
SIMULATE
REGRESS
BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
OUTECL3
VFP
Example
RECOVERY
<RPMIN> <RPMAX> <SRPMIN> <SRPMAX> /
248
Keywords
RECOVERY
REGRESS
RUNSPEC
SYSTEM
SPLIT
GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
X REGRESS
BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
OUTECL3
VFP
If present, this section must not appear before the SYSTEM section.
This section is used to perform a regression of the equation of state parameters such as to
minimize the difference between observed and calculated results of the following experiments:
equilibrium flash
saturated pressure
differential liberation
swelling test
vaporization test
Keywords
REGRESS
249
REGTARG
RUNSPEC
SYSTEM
SPLIT
GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
X REGRESS
BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
OUTECL3
VFP
Regression target
This quantity allows the default regression target to be changed. The regression target is applied
to the sum of squares of the differences between the calculated and observed values. If a solution
is found for which the residual approaches zero, the regression returns successfully when the
sum of squares falls below this value. If there is a non-zero residual minimum this limit is
applied to the derivatives of the residual at the minimum.
DEFAULT: 0.000001.
Example
RETARG
0.1D-8
250
Keywords
REGTARG
RTEMP
RUNSPEC
SYSTEM
SPLIT
GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
REGRESS
BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
X OUTECL3
VFP
Example
Specify a reservoir temperature of 200 F :
RTEMP
200.0
Keywords
RTEMP
251
RUNSPEC
X RUNSPEC
SYSTEM
SPLIT
GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
REGRESS
BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
OUTECL3
VFP
252
Keywords
RUNSPEC
SALINITY
RUNSPEC
X SYSTEM
SPLIT
GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
REGRESS
BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
OUTECL3
VFP
Example
RTEMP
200.0
Keywords
SALINITY
253
SAMPLE
RUNSPEC
SYSTEM
SPLIT
GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
REGRESS
BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
X OUTECL3
VFP
APITRACK
254
Keywords
SAMPLE
SAMPLES
RUNSPEC
X SYSTEM
SPLIT
GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
REGRESS
BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
OUTECL3
VFP
Note that the default sample composition is given by the ZI keyword and is given the
mnemonic of ZI.
Thus, each line consists of the composition mnemonic followed by up to N c mole fractions,
which should sum to unity, followed by a forward slash (/) character. The last composition
should be followed by another forward slash (/) character.
The composition of the lean gas injection fluid used in a swelling test should be defined under
this keyword.
Example
Lean gas composition for swelling test:
SAMPLES
ZINJ 2*
/
0.9468
0.0527
0.0005
4*
Keywords
SAMPLES
255
SAMPLES
RUNSPEC
SYSTEM
SPLIT
GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
REGRESS
BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
OUTECL3
VFP
X APITRACK
256
Keywords
SAMPLES
SAMTITLE
RUNSPEC
X SYSTEM
SPLIT
GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
REGRESS
BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
OUTECL3
VFP
Example
Second sample from deeper in the column. Lean gas composition for swelling test:
SAMTITLE
Z2
Second sample from deeper in the column /
ZINJ Lean gas composition for swelling test /
/
Keywords
SAMTITLE
257
SAVCOMP
RUNSPEC
SYSTEM
SPLIT
GROUP
COMB
X SIMULATE
REGRESS
BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
OUTECL3
VFP
Save compositions
If you have turned on the OPTIONS switch for saving compositions calculated during
experiments, this keyword may be used in the SIMULATE section to save compositions to
named samples. Each line in this section contains the experiment number, the fluid type required
(from XMF, YMF, ZMF, for liquid, vapor and total compositions), the stage of the experiment if
it is a multi-stage experiment, and the sample name required. The stage index should be omitted
if the experiment is not a multi-stage experiment. In the particular case of the stock tank stage
of a SEPS experiment, you should enter ST for the stage indicator.
Each record is terminated by a forward slash (/) character. The set of records must be ended by
a blank record, containing only a slash.
Example
Save the total composition for experiment 4, a COMPG experiment, at stage (here depth) 4, and
label it Z80. Save the liquid output from stage 3 of experiment 2, a SEPS experiment, and label
it S23, and the stock tank vapor output of the same experiment, labelling it ST2:
SAVCOMP
4 ZMF 4 Z80 /
2 XMF 3 S23 /
2 YMF ST ST2 /
/
258
Keywords
SAVCOMP
SCT
RUNSPEC
X SYSTEM
X SPLIT
GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
REGRESS
BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
OUTECL3
VFP
The first line of data specifies the mnemonic of the heavy end to split, the number of
pseudo-components required (which must be between two and five), the minimum mole
weight in the plus fraction (the Whitson -parameter) and the mole weight of the heaviest
pseudo-component required. As a default, the heaviest pseudo-component weight could be
set to 1.5 and 2.0 times the heaviest plus fraction mole weight.
Next follows N samp lines of data, one for each sample currently defined. On each line should
be the sample mnemonic, the skewness parameter (Whitson -parameter), the sample plus
fraction mole weight and specific gravity.
Example
The default and one alternative sample from different depths in the hydrocarbon column, and
therefore different mole weights and specific gravities for the C7+ plus fraction. Different
compositions are on the ZI and SAMPLES keyword, sample ZALT, which preceded this
keyword and data. Three pseudo-component split requested with minimum and maximum mole
weights of 90.0 and 300.0. Different skewness parameters reflects compositional grading in
fluid from top (ZI - low Alpha) to bottom (ZALT - high Alpha).
SCT
C7+ 3
ZI
ZALT
/
90.0
1.10
2.30
300.0
130.0
150.0
/
0.75
0.80
/
/
Keywords
SCT
259
SG
RUNSPEC
SYSTEM
Z SPLIT
GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
REGRESS
BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
OUTECL3
VFP
260
Keywords
SG
Specifies the specific gravity (with respect to water at standard conditions) for the plus fraction
to be split. The record is terminated by a forward slash (/) character.
Example
SG
0.86 /
SIMULATE
RUNSPEC
SYSTEM
SPLIT
GROUP
COMB
X SIMULATE
REGRESS
BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
OUTECL3
VFP
If present, this section must not appear before the SYSTEM section.
equilibrium flash
differential liberation
swelling test
vaporization test
multiphase flashes
ternary diagrams
critical point
compositional gradient
Keywords
SIMULATE
261
SPECHA-D
RUNSPEC
X SYSTEM
SPLIT
GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
REGRESS
BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
OUTECL3
VFP
The values are output only in EoS data for ECLIPSE Compositional input files and
only if OPTION number 7 is turned on.
Example
For a two component system, in PVT-Metric units:
-- Specific Heat Coefficients A kJ/kgm/K
SPECHA
5.409000000E+00 -4.224000000E+00
262
Keywords
SPECHA-D
3.215000000E-08
SPLIT
RUNSPEC
SYSTEM
X SPLIT
GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
REGRESS
BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
OUTECL3
VFP
If present, this section must not appear before the SYSTEM section.
This section is used to define data necessary for the splitting of the plus fraction, assumed to be
the last component.
Keywords
SPLIT
263
SSHIFT
RUNSPEC
X SYSTEM
SPLIT
GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
REGRESS
BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
OUTECL3
VFP
264
Keywords
SSHIFT
Example
SSHIFT
0.15 0.05
-0.05
-0.03
-0.01
0.01
0.05
0.12
STCOND
RUNSPEC
X SYSTEM
SPLIT
GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
REGRESS
BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
OUTECL3
VFP
Standard conditions
Specifies the current standard conditions. This is followed by the standard temperature and
pressure values. The record is terminated by a forward slash (/) character.
Example
Standard conditions in degrees Fahrenheit and psia:
STCOND
60.0 14.7
Keywords
STCOND
265
SYSTEM
RUNSPEC
X SYSTEM
SPLIT
GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
REGRESS
BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
OUTECL3
VFP
266
Keywords
SYSTEM
Keywords T - Z
This section contains the T-Z keywords.
The other PVTi keywords are listed as follows:
"Keywords A-D" on page 168
"Keywords E-K" on page 191
"Keywords L- O" on page 213
"Keywords P- S" on page 241.
Keywords
Keywords T - Z
267
TBOIL
RUNSPEC
X SYSTEM
SPLIT
GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
REGRESS
BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
OUTECL3
VFP
Specifies the boiling point temperatures for the components in the system. The keyword is
followed by N c values, where N c is the number of components specified in the RUNSPEC
section, and terminated with a / character. The current temperature convention is used. The
default is degrees K , and for alternatives a DEGREES keyword should have been previously
read.
Note
Boiling points are only required if the Zudkevitch-Joffe equation has been selected.
Example
For a two component CO2/I-C4 system, using degrees K :
TBOIL
194.70
268
Keywords
TBOIL
261.30
TCRIT
RUNSPEC
X SYSTEM
SPLIT
GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
REGRESS
BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
OUTECL3
VFP
DEFAULT: degrees K . For alternatives a DEGREES keyword should have been previously
read.
Example
For a two component CO2/I-C4 system, using degrees K :
TCRIT
305.6 408.1 /
Keywords
TCRIT
269
THERMX
RUNSPEC
X SYSTEM
SPLIT
GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
REGRESS
BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
OUTECL3
VFP
The specified value is only used if the appropriate OPTIONS switch is in force.
Example
Default value with temperature in degrees Centigrade, that is THERMX in C 1 :
THERMX
0.0005
270
Keywords
THERMX
TITLE
X RUNSPEC
SYSTEM
SPLIT
GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
REGRESS
BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
OUTECL3
VFP
The syntax is slightly different from that of other keywords, in that no terminating
forward slash (/) character is required.
Example
TITLE
18 component condensate test
Keywords
TITLE
271
TLOW
RUNSPEC
SYSTEM
SPLIT
GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
REGRESS
BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
OUTECL3
X VFP
PVT properties for VFPi must be defined at least for two temperatures. The highest temperature,
assumed to be reservoir temperature, is set on the constant composition expansion (CCE)
experiment definition under the EXP keyword. The lowest temperature in the production string
is defined using this keyword.
It is terminated with a forward slash (/) character.
Example
Production string runs through deep sea-water at 40 F
TLOW
40.0 /
272
Keywords
TLOW
TREF
RUNSPEC
X SYSTEM
SPLIT
GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
REGRESS
BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
OUTECL3
VFP
DEFAULT: degrees K . For alternatives a DEGREES keyword should have been previously
read.
Note
These reference temperatures are only required if the Zudkevitch-Joffe equation has
been selected.
Example
For a two component CO2/I-C4 system, using degrees K :
TLOW
40.0
Keywords
TREF
273
UNITS
X
X
X
X
RUNSPEC
SYSTEM
SPLIT
GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
REGRESS
BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
OUTECL3
VFP
APITRACK
This keyword specifies which unit convention is required, and sets flags to specify whether
absolute or gauge pressures, and mole fractions or mole percentages, are to be used.
The UNITS keyword is followed by a character string identifying the units convention, which
may be one of the following four:
DEFAULT: PVT-metric.
DEFAULT: FRACtions.
Example
Set to field units:
UNITS
F /
274
Keywords
UNITS
VAR
RUNSPEC
SYSTEM
SPLIT
GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
X REGRESS
BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
OUTECL3
VFP
I1
I2
I3
:
J1
J2
J3
:
K1
K2
K3
:
L1
L2
L3
:
IND1
IND2
IND3
:
LL1
LL2
LL3
:
UL1/
UL2 /
UL3 /
:
The strings S1,S2... identify variables for regression, the indices I1, J1 (and K1, L1 for
binaries) identify component ranges, lower and upper.
Possible strings identifying variables (that is, S1, S2 etc.) are:
OMEGAA: a values
OMEGAB: b values
In all cases except BIC, the lower and upper component indices should be specified. In the
case of BIC, lower and upper index ranges should be given, that is, in four values. For
example BIC 1 3 7 8 contains the BICS for (1, 7), (1, 8), (2, 7), (2, 8), (3, 7) and (3, 8).
2
The indices IND1, IND2, etc., specify the variable index as applied to the particular
variable. Special regression variables are available and are:
CHARMF: Mole Fractions of characterized and/or user components for any sample
MIXING: The mixing factor between two samples when using the MIX keyword.
Keywords
VAR
275
Note
In the case of SCTKW, THERMX, CHEUHA and MIXING the component and variable
indices are redundant as the variable applies to all components.
In the case of SCTALF and SCTMW, the I1 and K1 indices refer to the sample rather
than component range.
For the CHARMF two other sets of indices are needed to indicate the range of samples
over which the particular variable applies. This follows the syntax of the BIC
keyword. For example, CHARMF 1 2 4 5 contains the mole fractions for
components 4 and 5 for samples 1 and 2.
The quantities LL and UL specify limits imposed on the variables during the regression. All
variable limits are applied as a percentage of the current value, scaled to unity. Thus a maximum
value of 1.5 corresponds to allowing a 50% increase in any variable; a negative value implies
that the variable is allowed to change sign (restricted set!). Defaults are as follows:
Table 7.8
Variable
Lower limit
Upper limit
pc
0.5
1.5
Tc
0.5
1.5
Vc
0.5
1.5
Zc
0.5
1.5
0.5
1.5
0.5
1.5
0.5
2.0
BIC
-5.0
+5.0
si
-5.0
5.0
SCTALF
0.5
5.0
SCTMW
0.9
1.1
SCTKW
0.75
1.25
CHEUHA
0.5
1.25
THERMX
-5.0
5.0
CHARMW
0.9
1.1
CHARMF
.75
1.25
MIXING
.75
1.25
Grouped regression variables can be defined by giving them the same variable index.
276
Keywords
VAR
Examples
Example 1
Regression variables are the critical temperature for component 1, the a
values for
components 2 and 3, the binary interaction coefficient for components 1 and 10, and the volume
shift parameters for components 4 and 6 to 10 as a first grouped variable, and components 1 to
3 and 5 as a second grouped variable. Default limits are taken for all components except the
binary, which is restricted to a lower limit of 30% and an upper limit of 200% of the current
value:
VAR
TCRIT
1 1
OMEGAA 2 3
BIC
1 1 10 10 1 0.30 2.00
SSHIFT 1 3
1 /
SSHIFT 4 4
SSHIFT 5 5
SSHIFT 6 10
/
2
1
2
/
/
/
Example 2
The default settings for the first five special regression variables with a system of three samples
is as follows:
VAR
SCTALF
SCTALF
SCTALF
SCTMW
SCTMW
SCTMW
SCTKW
CHEUHA
THERMX
/
Note
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
3
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
3
0.750000
0.500000
-5.000000
0.500000
0.500000
0.500000
0.900000
0.900000
0.900000
1.250000 /
1.500000 /
5.000000 /
5.000000
5.000000
5.000000
1.100000
1.100000
1.100000
/
/
/
/
/
/
The special regression variables SCTALF and SCTMW cannot be grouped into one
variable and must be entered in the manner shown above, that is one variable for each
sample.
Keywords
VAR
277
Specify volumes
VCRIT
RUNSPEC
X SYSTEM
SPLIT
GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
REGRESS
BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
OUTECL3
VFP
Specifies the critical volumes for the components in the system. The keyword is followed by
N c values, where N c is the number of components specified in the RUNSPEC section, and
terminated with a forward slash (/) character.
The critical volumes are in volume per mole at critical pressure and temperature.
UNITS:
m /kg-mole (METRIC),
m /kg-mole (PVT-M).
VCRIT values may be entered as an alternative to ZCRIT values - that is one of VCRIT or
ZCRIT should be entered. If VCRIT values are entered, critical Z -factors are obtained
internally using the usual relationship:
p crit V crit
-,
Z crit = -----------------RT crit
[EQ 7.1]
Example
For a 20-component system, in field units:
VCRIT
1.5057
4.0847
7.8058
13.779
/
278
Keywords
VCRIT
1.4417
4.9337
8.8374
4.759
1.5698
4.9817
9.8465
15.684
2.3707
5.8948
10.830
16.018
3.2037
6.0710
11.799
16.018
VCRITVIS
RUNSPEC
X SYSTEM
SPLIT
GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
REGRESS
BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
OUTECL3
VFP
UNITS:
m /kg-mole (METRIC),
m /kg-mole (PVT-M).
VCRITVIS values may be entered as an alternative to ZCRITVIS values; that is, one of
VCRITVIS or ZCRITVIS should be entered. If VCRITVIS values are entered, critical Z factors are obtained internally using the usual relationship:
p crit V critv
Z critv = --------------------,
RT crit
[EQ 7.2]
Example
For a 20-component system, in Field units:
VCRITVIS
1.5057
1.4417
1.5698
2.3707
3.2037
4.0847
4.9337
4.9817
5.8948
6.0710
7.8058
8.8374
9.8465
10.830
11.799
13.779
14.759
15.684
16.018
16.018
Keywords
VCRITVIS
279
VERSION
x RUNSPEC
SYSTEM
SPLIT
GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
REGRESS
BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
OUTECL3
VFP
Version of PVTi
This keyword indicates the version of PVTi that created the PVI file.
Caution
VERSION
2001A /
280
Keywords
VERSION
VFP
RUNSPEC
SYSTEM
SPLIT
GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
REGRESS
BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
OUTECL3
X VFP
This section is used to generate blackoil tables for VFPi, for any of the currently defined fluid
samples, by simulating phase and volumetric changes in the wellbore with a constant
composition expansion and separator flash at high (reservoir) and low temperatures. Tables are
generated that can then be input into VFPi.
Keywords
VFP
281
WAT100
RUNSPEC
SYSTEM
SPLIT
GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
REGRESS
X BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
OUTECL3
VFP
Flag for units of salinity (P for Parts per million (ppm), G for grammes per liter (gpl))
Salinities. This can have just one value if the PVTW keyword is required, but up to ten
values if PVTWSALT is required (zero salinities can be defaulted with *). Units are given
by the above flag.
Examples
Example 1
For PVTW output, salt present of salinity 10000 ppm, with gas dissolved. Temperature 200 F ,
pressure 5514.7 psi.
--Water properties requested for E100
WAT100
200.00000 5514.70000 Y S P Y
10000.0000
/
Example 2
For PVTWSALT output, salt present with salinities 10, 20 and 30 gpl, with no gas dissolved.
Temperature 200 F , pressure 5514.7 psi.
-- Water properties requested for E100
WAT100
200.00000 5514.70000 Y M G N
10.0000
20.0000
30.0000 7*
/
282
Keywords
WAT100
WAT200
RUNSPEC
SYSTEM
SPLIT
GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
REGRESS
BLACKOIL
X PSEUCOMP
OUTECL3
VFP
Flag for units of salinity (P for Parts per million (ppm), G for grammes per liter (gpl))
Salinities. This can have just one value if the PVTW keyword is required, but up to 10 values
if PVTWSALT is required (zero salinities can be defaulted with *). Units are given by the
above flag.
Examples
Example 1
For PVTW output, salt present of salinity 10000 ppm, with gas dissolved. Temperature 200 F ,
pressure 5514.7 psi.
--Water properties requested for E200
WAT100
200.00000 5514.70000 Y S P Y
10000.0000
/
Example 2
For PVTWSALT output, salt present with salinities 10, 20 and 30 gpl, with no gas dissolved.
Temperature 200 F , pressure 5514.7 psi.
-- Water properties requested for E200
WAT200
200.00000 5514.70000 Y M G N
10.0000
20.0000
30.0000 7*
/
Keywords
WAT200
283
WAT300
RUNSPEC
SYSTEM
SPLIT
GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
REGRESS
BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
X OUTECL3
VFP
Flag for units of salinity (P for Parts per million (ppm), G for grammes per liter (gpl))
Example
For PVTW output, salt present of salinity 10000 ppm, with gas dissolved. Temperature 200 F ,
pressure 5514.7 psi.
--Water properties requested for E300
WAT300
200.00000 5514.70000 Y P Y
10000.0000
/
284
Keywords
WAT300
WATVFP
RUNSPEC
SYSTEM
SPLIT
GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
REGRESS
BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
OUTECL3
X VFP
Flag for units of salinity (P for Parts per million, G for grammes per liter)
Example
For PVTW output, salt present of salinity 10000 poem, with gas dissolved. Calculated at
temperatures 200 F and 80 F , pressure 6000.0 psi.
--Water properties requested for VFP
WATVFP
200.00000
/
6000.00000
80.00000
6000.00000
Y P Y
10000.0000
Keywords
WATVFP
285
WETGAS
RUNSPEC
SYSTEM
SPLIT
GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
REGRESS
X BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
OUTECL3
VFP
X APITRACK
286
Keywords
WETGAS
WHIT
RUNSPEC
SYSTEM
X SPLIT
GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
REGRESS
BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
OUTECL3
VFP
Example
Split C 7+ with z7+ = 0.1 , M 7+ = 140.0 , 7+ = 0.85 into three pseudo-components:
WHIT
7 0.10
140.0
0.85
Keywords
WHIT
287
WHITSON
X
X
X
RUNSPEC
SYSTEM
SPLIT
GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
REGRESS
BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
OUTECL3
VFP
288
Keywords
WHITSON
Blackoil tables
Specifies that the Whitson and Torp method for the generation of blackoil tables is used in
preference to the Coats method. By default, the program uses the Whitson and Torp method.
The keyword WHITSON has no arguments.
X/YMFVP
RUNSPEC
SYSTEM
SPLIT
GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
REGRESS
BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
X OUTECL3
VFP
You must also define a Constant Volume Depletion (CVD) experiment via the EXP
keyword and associated data in order that the XMFVP and YMFVP tables can be
generated.
Only two pressures need be defined in the CVD, which should be the maximum and
minimum required.
Keywords
X/YMFVP
289
ZCRIT
RUNSPEC
X SYSTEM
SPLIT
GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
REGRESS
BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
OUTECL3
VFP
Specifies the critical Z -factors for the components in the system. The keyword is followed by
N c values, where N c is the number of components specified in the RUNSPEC section, and
terminated with a / character.
ZCRIT values may be entered as an alternative to VCRIT values, but one of VCRIT or ZCRIT
should be entered. If ZCRIT values are entered, critical volumes are obtained internally using
the usual relationship:
RT crit Z crit
V crit = ----------------------,
p crit
[EQ 7.3]
Example
For a CO2/Methane/Ethane/I-C4 system:
ZCRIT
0.2709
290
Keywords
ZCRIT
0.2809
0.2808
0.279
ZCRITVIS
RUNSPEC
X SYSTEM
SPLIT
GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
REGRESS
BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
OUTECL3
VFP
[EQ 7.4]
Example
For a CO2/Methane/Ethane/I-C4 system:
ZCRIT
0.2709
0.2809
0.2808
0.279
Keywords
ZCRITVIS
291
ZI
RUNSPEC
X SYSTEM
SPLIT
GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
REGRESS
BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
OUTECL3
VFP
Specifies the mole fractions for the components in the system. The keyword is followed by N c
values, and terminated with a forward slash (/) character, where N c is the number of
components specified in the RUNSPEC section.
Example
For a two-component CO2/I-C4 system, 60/40 mixture:
ZI
0.6
292
Keywords
ZI
0.4 /
ZMFVD
RUNSPEC
SYSTEM
SPLIT
GROUP
COMB
SIMULATE
REGRESS
BLACKOIL
PSEUCOMP
X OUTECL3
VFP
You must also define a COMPG experiment using the EXP keyword and associated data
in order that the ZMFVD table can be generated.
Only two depths need be defined in the experiment, which should be the maximum and
minimum required.
Keywords
ZMFVD
293
Technical Description
Chapter 8
Overview
This section of the manual contains information on the following:
Technical Description
Overview
294
General background
Both in the fully compositional and extended black oil formulations of reservoir simulation, an
accurate description of the hydrocarbon system and its properties is important.
In the compositional case the phase behavior of the hydrocarbon system is an integral part of
the simulation. Equal phase fugacity conditions or flash calculations are used to determine the
phase split and composition.
In the black-oil and extended black-oil formulations averaged properties of the oil and gas
phases such as Bo (oil volume factor), Rs (solution gas-oil ratio), B g (gas volume factor) and R v
(condensate gas ratio) are obtained through laboratory experiments or by using an equation of
state description of the hydrocarbon system.
PVTi Reference Manual
Technical Description
Theoretical background of PVT
295
Laboratory tests
Information on oil and gas properties is normally obtained through laboratory tests upon oil and
gas samples. These yield:
1
The mole fraction, molecular weight and specific gravity of the residual
The mole distribution of the lighter components is usually obtained through gas
chromatography, providing a quantitative separation of the lighter components into pure
compounds with known properties. The heavier components are then lumped into pseudocomponents, for example a C7+ fraction containing hydrocarbons with carbon numbers from
seven upwards.
Beside this simple laboratory analysis more complex methods for analyzing oil and gas samples
are coming into use. In these methods the residual (C7+ fraction) is split up into sub-fractions
through a distillation of the residual. The boiling point of each of these sub-fractions is then used
to assign pseudo component properties through empirical correlations.
Expansion experiments are often carried out on oil and gas samples from the reservoir to
evaluate volume factors in conditions that reflect the depletion process in the reservoir as
closely as possible.
On the basis of these experimental data, a model composition of the hydrocarbon mixture can
be developed and used in combination with an equation of state model to calculate additional
oil and gas properties at reservoir conditions and at surface conditions.
The oil and gas volume factors used in black oil type models depend on the process facilities
and configuration. The equation of state model allows black oil tables to be evaluated for
various process facilities and configurations.
An excellent summary of many of the features required to build up an understanding of fluid
phase behavior from sampling considerations through laboratory techniques to the use of
Equations of State can be found in the text of Pedersen et al., and McCain, [Ref. 33].
Pure components
The natural gas and crude oil found in underground natural deposits are mixtures of a large
number of different hydrocarbon components and some additional non-hydrocarbons such as
CO2 , H 2 S , N 2 , H 2 and CO .
296
Technical Description
Theoretical background of PVT
Hydrocarbon groups
Hydrocarbons are usually divided into groups based on characteristics in molecular structure.
The most important of these groups are:
Alkanes or paraffins
Alkanes or paraffins are very stable chemical compounds. The chemical formula for compounds
in the group is C n H 2n + 2 . The group contains hydrocarbon components such as:
Table 8.1
Formula
Alkanes
Name
C1 H4
Methane
C2 H6
Ethane
C3 H8
Propane
C 4 H 10
Butane
C 5 H 12
Pentane
C 6 H 14
Hexane
C 7 H 16
Heptane
C 10 H 22
Decane
Each of these molecules can exist as a single straight chain of carbon atoms attached to three
(end carbons), or two (non-end carbons) hydrogen atoms (except Methane, which has four
attached hydrogens).
Isomers
For molecules containing four carbons or more, additional structures other than the straight
chains are possible. The number of these branched molecules or isomers increases with
increasing carbon number.
Butane has one isomer in addition to the straight-chained normal-Butane, the branched
molecule iso-Butane.
Pentane has two isomers in addition to the normal-Pentane, known as iso- and neo-Pentane.
The neo- isomer (cross-shaped) is rarely found in naturally-occurring petroleum. Most
fluid analyses include the iso- and normal- components of Butane and Pentane.
Hexane (six carbon atoms) has four isomers in addition to the normal-Hexane.
Note
The number of isomers increases rapidly with carbon number making the
identification of the increasingly small concentration of these isomers impossible.
Technical Description
Theoretical background of PVT
297
Napthenes or cycloparaffins
Napthenes are characterized by the chemical formula C n H2n . Important members in this family
are:
Table 8.2
Napthenes
Formula
Name
C3 H6
Cyclopropane
C 5 H 10
Cyclopentane
They share the same formula as the alkenes, which are the same as the alkanes except that one
or more pairs of carbon atoms are linked by double bonds with the consequent loss of one or
more hydrogen atoms.
Note
Alkenes and their triple bond equivalents, the alkynes, are rarely found in naturally
occurring petroleum.
Any one of the hydrogens can be replaced by a methyl-( CH3 ) or higher group, for example
C 7 H 14 , Methylcyclohexane.
Aromatics
The third family of hydrocarbons are aromatics. These are ring-type structures. Some of the best
known members of this family are:
Table 8.3
Aromatics
Formula
Name
C6 H6
Benzene
C7 H8
Toluene
SCN groups
All of napthenes, aromatics, more complicated hydrocarbons (polynuclear molecules),
hydrocarbons compounds containing other species, namely Nitrogen, Sulphur, Oxygen and
certain trace metals, are all capable of existing as isomers. Identification of even a relatively
small number of the possible isomers within a petroleum mixture is a complicated and therefore
expensive task.
It is standard practice within the petroleum industry to lump all isomers together on the basis of
the boiling point of the molecule.
Single Carbon Number (SCN) groups are defined for components, for example hexanes,
heptanes, etc. Components are pure hydrocarbon components with normal boiling point
temperatures, that is at one atmosphere pressure, between consecutive normal-paraffin boiling
points.
For example, the SCN hexanes group consists of those hydrocarbons that boil between the
normal boiling points of n-pentane and n-hexane.
298
Technical Description
Theoretical background of PVT
Physical properties
Term
Nomenclature
Tc
Critical temperature
pc
Critical pressure
Vc
Critical volume
Zc
Critical Z -factor
Mw
Molecular weight
Acentric factor
Tb
ref
T ref
Reference temperature
[P]
The component library in PVTi contains properties for some of the more common pure
components.
Multi-component mixtures
As mentioned previously, natural gas and crude oil contains literally thousands of different
components. No attempt is usually made to identify all the hydrocarbons beyond C 5 : rather,
SCN groups denoted hexanes, heptanes, etc., are used. Even so, you may be left with ten or more
components in any given petroleum mixture.
To describe a multi-component system thermodynamically using an equation of state model, the
system must be defined in terms of the properties of the components and their mole fractions in
the mixture.
The terms and nomenclature used to characterize multi-component mixtures may be
summarized as follows, where the subscript i denotes the i th component:
Table 8.5
Term
Nomenclature
T c, i
Critical temperature
p c, i
Critical pressure
M w, i
Molecular weight
Acentric factor
Technical Description
Theoretical background of PVT
299
Table 8.5
Term
Nomenclature
xi
yi
zi
Note
Phase diagrams
In terms of a phase diagram plotted against pressure and temperature, the upper part of the phase
envelope, up to the critical point, represents the bubble-point curve.
From the critical point the phase envelope continues as dew point curve. The phase envelope
encircles the two phase region in the phase diagram.
A phase diagram is often characterized by the maximum pressure, the cricondenbar, and the
maximum temperature, cricondentherm.
The area within the phase envelope bounded by a vertical line through the critical point and the
line represented by the cricondentherm is the retrograde area. A reduction of pressure into this
area results in retrograde condensation.
For the RK and ZJ equations of state the critical point calculation implements the theory
developed in [Ref. 50].
For the PR and SRK equations of state the calculations use the theory developed in the followup paper in [Ref. 47].
Components
All components in PVTi are labeled as being one of three possible types:
300
LIB: Library
Technical Description
Theoretical background of PVT
CHAR: Characterization
LIB components
Lib components are the commonly occurring hydrocarbons C 1 , C 2 ,..., C 45 and the specific nonhydrocarbons H2 O , H 2 S , CO2 , N 2 , H 2 and CO .
CHAR components
Components designated as CHAR are typically the last component in a PVT report and as such
comprise the plus fraction, that is, contains all remaining hydrocarbons. For such fractions, a
laboratory would typically measure only the mole weight and specific gravity, denoted here by
M N+ , N+ , where N is the number of the first carbon group in the fraction.
User components
User components are those for which you must supply all the data necessary to define the
equation of state parameters, that is T c , pc , Vc , M w and .
Characterization
Clearly, correlations are required that are capable of generating the critical properties and
acentric factors from just the mole weight and specific gravity.
In general, any p - V - T report gives at least the mole weight of the plus fraction. If this is the
only information available, PVTi estimates a value of the specific gravity from known (SCN)
distributions. Otherwise, any two out of the four of M w , , T b , K w is sufficient to characterize
a component.
PVTi employs five sets of correlations for generating critical properties by:
[EQ 8.1]
where:
T bi
Technical Description
Theoretical background of PVT
301
Splitting
The plus fraction often has an importance that appears to far outweigh its relatively small mole
fraction of a fluid sample. In particular, saturation pressure calculations can be extremely
sensitive to the mole fraction and properties of the plus fraction. More accurate predictions
requiring less regression of equation of state parameters can be achieved if a thorough
description of the plus fraction can be made.
Ideally, a complete true-boiling-point distillation (TBP) should be made that yields not only the
detailed composition of the plus fraction but also the boiling points, specific gravities and
molecular weights of the constituent components. However, this analysis is rarely performed
and so a general procedure to describe the distribution of components and properties within a
plus fraction is required.
Three techniques are available within PVTi for the splitting of the plus fraction into subfractions:
Whitson.
All of these techniques rely on a probability density function (PDF) to relate mole fraction to
mole weight. This approach is due to Whitson [Ref. 4].
p ( M ) = ------------------------------------------------------------------
()
[EQ 8.2]
where:
, ,
is the gamma-function
M N + =
p ( x ) dx
[EQ 8.4]
302
Technical Description
Theoretical background of PVT
P(X x) = e
+j
y
----------------------------( + j + 1)
[EQ 8.5]
j=0
where y = ( x )
The frequency, f i of a component i having mole weight boundaries M i 1 , M i is given by the
integral:
fi =
Mi
[EQ 8.6]
p ( M ) dM
i1
[EQ 8.7]
= P ( M M i ) P ( M Mi 1 )
zi = zN + fi
[EQ 8.9]
where the P ( X x ) functions all use the same value of regardless of the value of , (that is
or + 1 ) and where z N + is the total mole fraction of the plus fraction.
In the absence of any other data, you should assume that is unity. The parameter is the
minimum mole weight that occurs in the plus fraction, therefore if the plus fraction were C 7+ ,
then a good estimate to is 92.0.
Generally, Whitson recommends:
[EQ 8.10]
= 14n 6
where n is the first SCN group in the plus fraction, for example 7.
Note
Both splitting techniques available in PVTi use the Whitson PDF to define the mole
fraction/mole weight distribution of the plus fraction, however, they differ slightly in
the way they sub-divide into the required number of pseudo-components.
Generally, you may consider skewing the distribution thus: highest mole fraction for the lightest
pseudo-component to smallest mole fraction for the heaviest pseudo-component.
Hint
If you have evidence on the shape of the plus fraction distribution, it may be prudent
to manually change the skewness parameter , that is less than unity for a condensate
and greater than unity for a crude oil.
Technical Description
Theoretical background of PVT
303
The value of the minimum mole weight in the plus fraction rarely needs changing from its
(calculated) default value.
Knowing the required mole fraction split, PVTi then integrates the PDF from up to some mole
weight M 1 such that integral gives the correct first mole fraction, and then similarly for the
remaining pseudo-components.
Knowing the mole weight boundaries, the program can calculate the average mole weights of
the pseudo-components, estimate the specific gravities from the SCN distributions and calculate
the critical properties, etc., from the various correlations currently in force.
Whitson
The Whitson technique consists of splitting the plus fraction into SCN groups N (the first in the
plus fraction) to some high number, for example 45.
The mole weight boundaries are estimated from the user specified plus fraction mole weight and
specific gravity from which one can calculate a plus fraction Watson factor:
0.15178 0.84573
K w, N+ = 4.5579M w, N+ N+
[EQ 8.11]
Assuming that an average Watson factor K w, N+ can be applied to each individual SCN groups,
the SCN groups specific gravities can be estimated from equation (1), namely:
13
T b, i
i = -------------K w, N+
[EQ 8.12]
where the T b, i are the normal boiling point temperatures of the SCN groups, which in fact define
the SCN groups. That is SCN C6 is all hydrocarbons that have normal boiling point
temperatures between those of normal- C 5 and normal- C 6 , etc.
Then, with known boiling points and specific gravities, mole weights can be estimated using the
Riazi-Daubert correlation, which is of the general form:
b c
= aT b
[EQ 8.13]
where is the property to be evaluated, say M w and ( a ,b ,c ) are tabulated coefficients, see [Ref.
4].
With average mole weights for the SCN groups, the boundary mole weights are estimated from:
1
M i = --- ( M i 1 + M i )
2
[EQ 8.14]
These can then be used to integrate the PDF to give mole fractions for each of the SCN groups.
Hint
Generally, you will not want to work with 20-30 additional components. Therefore the
SCN groups are pseudoised down into Multi-Carbon Number (MCN) groups. A
method for estimating the required number of MCN groups is that due to Sturges,
discussed in [Ref. 4]. However, this often predicts the use of four or five pseudocomponents. It has been our experience that two or three pseudo-components is
sufficient for most purposes.
304
Technical Description
Theoretical background of PVT
i = lN
1
M l = --zl
zi Mi
[EQ 8.15]
i = l1
where the summation is performed over the SCN groups i in the MCN group l and z l is the
mole fraction of the l th MCN group.
N
x
f ( x )e dx =
wi f ( xi )
[EQ 8.16]
i=1
where the weighting factors w i and quadrature points x i are determined from a class of Laguerre
polynomials for a given order N , see [Ref. 31].
For our mole weight/mole composition model, we can associate the quadrature points xi with
pseudo-component mole weights M i = + x i and the mole fractions z i = w i f ( xi ) .
To account for compositional variations with depth, Whitson extended the standard model to
account for these variations, or plus fraction mole weight and skewness parameter. Since
different plus fraction mole weights and skewness parameters lead to different parameters,
the following modification was introduced:
0
= -------------------------[ 1 + ln ( ) ]
[EQ 8.17]
where 0 and are parameters in the modified distribution function p0 ( M ) given by:
( 1)
(M )
( M ) ( 1 + ln ( ) ) p 0 ( M ) = -------------------------------exp ---------------------- ----------------------------= p(M)
[ ( M ) 0 ]
0
0 ( )
[EQ 8.18]
[EQ 8.19]
with dM = 0 dx to give:
( 1 ) x0
e
x0
--------------------------------------------------dx = 1
0
x
( ) 0 ( 1 + ln ( ) )
[EQ 8.20]
x0
( 1 + ln ( ) )
f ( x0 ) = ---------------------------------------------x
( ) 0
[EQ 8.21]
and thus the mole fraction and mole weight are given by:
Technical Description
Theoretical background of PVT
305
z i = w i f ( x 0i )
[EQ 8.22]
M i = + 0 x 0i
[EQ 8.23]
Procedure
The procedure for using this method is particularly attractive.
Firstly we choose the number of pseudo-components required, N , which is normally in the
range 2 N 5 : this then fixes the values of weights and points, w i and xi .
The minimum mole weight is chosen as before.
Next we specify 0 which is done by selecting the maximum mole weight component to be
used: Whitson recommends M N = 500.0 but we prefer 2 M N+ . Either way we now have:
MN
0 = ----------------x 0N
[EQ 8.24]
Next we estimate a value for the skewness parameter, which as before is taken as unity in the
absence of any other information. Then to satisfy the total number of moles and mass, we
calculate:
= exp ----0- 1
[EQ 8.25]
and calculate the mole fractions and mole weights. Finally, the average plus fraction mole
weight is checked:
N
zi Mi
M N+ =
[EQ 8.26]
i------------------=1
N
zi
i=1
and the is adjusted if [EQ 8.26]does not equate to the measured value.
The appeal of this model is it allows a variable plus fractions mole weight and skewness
parameter by sample composition. That is different plus fraction mole weight and mole fraction,
but allows us to use a common set of pseudo-components with fixed mole weights and hence
critical properties.
Hint
Having used this procedure to characterize the plus fraction(s), you can then use the
special regression facility, which allows the sample plus fraction mole weights and
skewness parameters to be variables.
In particular, where there is a known variation of composition with depth and you have
at least two samples from different depths in the hydrocarbon column, this technique
can be used with some success, see [Ref. 32].
306
Technical Description
Theoretical background of PVT
This is then used to estimate specific gravities and hence critical properties, acentric factors,
etc., as per the original Whitson model. The additional feature is the new characterization factor,
F c , which can be regressed, that is:
tot
cal
reg
[EQ 8.27]
Fc = Fc Fc
reg
where Fcal
is
c is the value calculated by the Whitson model, that is assuming SCN-cuts, and F c
the potentially regressable function which defaults to unity. This allows you to make your fluid
more or less aromatic with respect to the standard distribution (equivalent to a K w 12.0 ), which
in turn yields different critical properties, etc., and hence different fluid behavior.
Grouping
Grouping of components is performed by one of three techniques:
Molar averaging
Weight averaging
Mixing rule.
All of these are explained in the comprehensive text of Joergensen and Stenby [Ref. 44].
Consistency tests
Most fluids that show some form of compositional behavior, namely gas condensates and
volatile oils, are subject to a constant volume depletion experiment (CVD) as part of their
analysis. For further information see "Compositional material balance" on page 307.
A material balance calculation can be performed using the data that is generated from such an
experiment from which quantities such as liquid compositions, K -values, molecular weights
and densities of vapor and liquid, etc., can be evaluated. This data can then be examined to look
for any inconsistencies, such as lack of monotonicity.
Additional data often given in a laboratory PVT report are separator compositions for the liquid
and vapor streams. If such data is available, then K -values can be constructed and plotted
against theoretical fits, again as a test of consistency.
Finally, estimates of recovery of gas and oil from the reservoir can be made as well as generation
of blackoil tables, without recourse to the use of the equation of state model.
Technical Description
Theoretical background of PVT
307
Note
The model employed in PVTi was adapted from a program developed by Pearce [Ref.
20].
CVD Report
Equil
Liquid
Component
714.7
Carbon Dioxide
2.37
2.40
2.45
2.50
2.53
2.57
2.60
.59
Nitrogen
0.31
0.32
0.33
0.34
0.34
0.34
0.33
.01
Methane
73.19
75.56
77.89
79.33
79.62
78.9
77.8
12.42
Ethane
7.80
7.83
7.87
7.92
8.04
8.40
8.70
3.36
Propane
3.55
3.47
3.40
3.41
3.53
3.74
3.91
2.92
isoButane
.71
.67
.65
.64
.66
.72
.78
.91
n-Butane
1.45
1.37
1.31
1.30
1.33
1.44
1.56
2.09
isoPentane
.64
.59
.55
.53
.54
.59
.64
1.4
n-Pentane
.68
.62
.58
.56
.57
.61
.66
1.6
Hexanes
1.09
.97
.88
.83
.82
.85
.9
3.68
Heptanes plus
8.21
6.2
4.09
2.64
2.02
1.84
2.12
71.01
Total
100.00
100.00
100.00
100.00
100.00
100.00
100.00
100.00
Mw(C7+)
184.0
160.0
142.0
127.0
119.0
115.0
114.0
213.0
Sg(C7+)
.816
.799
.783
.770
.762
.758
.757
.833
Zvap
1.238
1.089
.972
.913
.914
.937
.960
Nprod
0.000
9.024
21.744
38.674
55.686
72.146
81.301
Sliq
0.00
14.1
19.70
21.60
21.30
20.20
19.3
This gas condensate with an assumed reservoir composition equal to composition at the first
pressure, which corresponds to the saturation pressure of the fluid, psat = 6764.7 psia is put
through the stages of the CVD.
The CVD consists of reducing the pressure to the required stage pressure, and then removing
gas so that the volume remaining in the cell is equal to volume at the saturation pressure.
308
Technical Description
Theoretical background of PVT
At each stage, the composition, mole weight and specific gravity of the plus fraction (denoted
Mw and Sg), the vapor Z -factor (denoted Zvap), the number of moles produced (denoted
Nprod) and the liquid saturation (denoted Sliq), are measured.
The subsequent analyses used to generate liquid compositions, K -values, volumes, masses and
densities follow those of Whitson and Torp [Ref. 6].
[EQ 8.28]
n tj z ij = n lj x ij + n vj y ij
[EQ 8.29]
where:
n tj , n lj , n vj
( p = p j ) and z ij , x ij , yij are the total, liquid and vapor mole fractions of component i .
Starting with one mole of fluid at the saturation pressure (first stage in the reported CVD), the
number of moles remaining the cell after the j th stage is:
j
n tj = 1
npk
[EQ 8.30]
k=2
where n pk is the number of moles of gas produced at stage, denoted Nprod in the table above,
so that n pk is the incremental gas recovered during the kth stage, that is, reducing the pressure
from p k 1 to p k .
Similarly, the mole fraction of the i th component remaining in the cell after the j th stage is:
j
n tj z ij = z i1
npk yik
[EQ 8.31]
k=2
Cell volumes
To convert moles and mole fractions to volumes, one must have some reference volume, such
as the volume of the cell.
For a gas condensate, the cell volume, for one mole, can be calculated from the real gas law:
Z 1 RT
V cell = -----------p1
[EQ 8.32]
where:
Z1
T is the temperature at which the CVD is performed, assumed constant throughout the
experiment.
and p1 are the vapor Z -factor and pressure at the first (saturation) pressure
is the universal gas constant
Technical Description
Theoretical background of PVT
309
For a volatile oil, a CVD report gives the molecular weight and density of the bubble point
liquid, M w1 and 1 , and thus the cell volume, again for one mole, is calculated as:
M w1
V cell = ---------1
[EQ 8.33]
Knowing the cell volume and the liquid saturation at the j th stage, S lj (denoted Sliq in the table
above), the volume of the cell occupied by liquid is:
[EQ 8.34]
V lj = S lj V cell
V vj = ( 1 S lj )V cell
[EQ 8.36]
Thus, the composition of the liquid remaining in the cell at the j th stage can be determined from:
n tj z ij n vj y ij
x ij = -----------------------------n tj n vj
[EQ 8.37]
Equilibrium K-values
The K -values can now be estimated from the ratio of the vapor and liquid mole fractions:
y
K ij = ----ijx ij
[EQ 8.38]
The best test of the consistency of the CVD data is to plot the logarithm of the p j K ij product
against the characterization factor F , [Ref. 20], where:
1 - --1-
F = b i -----T bi T
[EQ 8.39]
[EQ 8.40]
Here:
T ci
p ci
p ref
Plots
As pointed out by Bashbush, [Ref. 19], the curves should plot in a parallel-like trend, that is,
there should be no humps in any individual curve or crossing of any pair or pairs of curves.
The highest curve should belong to nitrogen, followed by methane and carbon dioxide.
310
Technical Description
Theoretical background of PVT
Then depending on the fluid composition, either ethane or hydrogen sulphide should be plotted
followed by the curves for the remaining hydrocarbon components in order of increasing
molecular weight.
Finally, it should be noted that the iso- components of butane and pentane should plot above
their corresponding normal components. This plot is available from PVTi.
Other useful plots consists of fingerprint plots of the liquid composition remaining in the cell at
the end of the CVD (the last column in the above table) and the equivalent calculated liquid
composition, and the calculated liquid compositions as a function of pressure. Both of these
plots are available from PVTi.
Physical properties
As well as performing material balances on moles and mole fractions, material balance can be
done on the total, liquid and vapor masses:
[EQ 8.41]
m tj = m lj + m vj
The total mass remaining the cell at the j th stage is given by:
j
m tj = M s
npk Mvk
[EQ 8.42]
k=2
where M s and M vk are the initial or saturation pressure molecular weight and the vapor
molecular weight at the kth stage, respectively, both of which can be evaluated from Kays rule:
Nc
M vj =
yij Mi
[EQ 8.43]
i=1
m vj = n vj M vj
m lj = m tj m vj
Now, knowing the masses and volumes of liquid and vapor in the cell at each stage, one can
calculate densities from = m V
Plots of these quantities are available from PVTi.
Correlations
Alani-Kennedy liquid densities
The liquid molar volume of a pure hydrocarbon component is given by the smallest real positive
root of the Van der Waals equation:
a- ( V b )
RT = p + ----2
V
[EQ 8.46]
Technical Description
Theoretical background of PVT
311
Alani and Kennedy, [Ref. 20], inserted known values of T , p and V into [Ref. 16] for two
pressures for a variety of hydrocarbons. Thus they were able to observe the variations of ( a ,b )
from which they derived:
a = K exp ( n T )
[EQ 8.47]
b = mT + C
[EQ 8.48]
where:
( n ,K ,m ,C )
C 1 , C 2 ,..., C 6 :
C 7+ can be calculated from given correlations in molecular weight and specific gravity of
the plus fraction and temperature (see [Ref. 22]).
a mix =
C N+
x i ai
b mix =
C1
x i bi
[EQ 8.49]
C1
Vapor Z-factor
The vapor Z -factor, Z vap , can be estimated from the correlation due to Dranchuk, Purvis and
Robinson [Ref. 21]:
0.27p
Z vap = ---------------r
r Tr
[EQ 8.50]
where T r and p r are the reduced temperature ( = T T c ) and reduced pressure ( = p pc ) , and r
is the pseudoreduced density, which is found by iteratively solving:
[EQ 8.51]
f ( r ) = 0
where:
6
f ( r ) = A r + B r + C r + D r + E r ( 1 + F r ) exp ( F r ) G
[EQ 8.52]
and:
312
A = 0.06423
[EQ 8.53]
B = 0.5353T r 0.6123
[EQ 8.54]
[EQ 8.55]
D = Tr
[EQ 8.56]
0.6816E = --------------2
Tr
[EQ 8.57]
F = 0.6845
[EQ 8.58]
G = 0.27T r
[EQ 8.59]
Technical Description
Theoretical background of PVT
[EQ 8.60]
Kays rule
Kays rule has been stated already, being a mole fraction weighted sum of the appropriate
quantity.
The correlations due to Wichert and Aziz, [Ref. 22], correct for the presence of the so-called
sour gases, CO2 , H2 S and N 2 .
The pseudo-critical temperature and pressure of the hydrocarbon portion of a condensate is
given by:
HC
HC 2
[EQ 8.61]
HC
HC 2
[EQ 8.62]
HC
HC
Tc
pc
where HC
is the hydrocarbon gas gravity that is related to the mixture gas gravity, mix
by:
g
g
mix
HC
[EQ 8.63]
with:
mix
yi Mi
= ------------------M air
[EQ 8.64]
[EQ 8.65]
2S
and
HC
2S
[EQ 8.66]
The correction to T pc and ppc in the presence of sour gas ( CO2 and H2 S ), due to Wichert and
Aziz, is:
= 120 [ ( y CO + y H S )
2
0.9
( y CO + y H S )
2
1.6
0.5
] + 15 ( y H
2S
4.0
yH S )
2
[EQ 8.67]
to give:
T pc = T pc
[EQ 8.68]
and
p pc ( T pc )
p pc = ---------------------------------------------------T pc + y H S ( 1 y H S )
2
[EQ 8.69]
Technical Description
Theoretical background of PVT
313
Gas viscosity
The dynamic gas viscosity of a hydrocarbon gas at a temperature T can be estimated from a
correlation due to Lee, Gonzalez and Eakin, [Ref. 24]:
C
[EQ 8.70]
g = A exp ( B )
where:
4
1.5
10 ( 9.4 + 0.02M w )T
A = ---------------------------------------------------------( 209.0 + 19.0M w + T )
[EQ 8.71]
B = 3.5 + 986.0
------------- + 0.01M w
T
[EQ 8.72]
C = 2.4 0.2B
[EQ 8.73]
and:
pM
= ----------wZRT
[EQ 8.74]
[EQ 8.75]
with:
4
8 2
[EQ 8.76]
8 2
[EQ 8.77]
314
Technical Description
Theoretical background of PVT
The feed to each stage of the separator can be calculated given the compositions of liquid and
vapor resulting from the separator flash, the GOR and the liquid density. It can be shown that
the phase split is given by F ( 1 + F ) where:
( GP std M )
F = ------------------------( RT std oil )
[EQ 8.78]
where:
xi Wi
i
Recovery calculations
For reservoirs whose initial pressure, p init , is greater than its saturation pressure, psat , estimates
of fluid recovery can be made if the Z -factors in the range p init p psat are known.
Note
Above the saturation pressure, no compositional changes in the fluid take place so for
a unit volume of the fluid at isothermal conditions:
n2 Z2
n1 Z1
---------- = ---------p1
p2
[EQ 8.79]
Starting with 100 moles of fluid at the initial reservoir pressure, the number of moles at some
pressure p j above the saturation pressure is:
left
nj
rem
[EQ 8.80]
p Z
= 100 ----j -----1
Zj p1
[EQ 8.81]
= 100 n j
where:
rem
nj
At pressures below the saturation pressure, the produced moles are known from the CVD
experiment.
The fluid at each stage can then be flashed to surface conditions, using separator or Standings
K -values to get the volumes of liquid and vapor that could be expected at the surface, assuming
100% efficiency in the separators.
An option exists to produce liquid along with gas, in a ratio defined by input relative
permeabilities, using the technique described in Reudelhuber and Hinds, refer to [Ref. 37].
Technical Description
Theoretical background of PVT
315
Equation of state
General information
PVTi allows you to fit data to an Equation of State. See "The fluid model" on page 98 and
"Batch system and keywords" on page 152 for further information on how to define Equations
of State in PVTi.
This section of the manual contains information on:
Material balance
We consider a hydrocarbon system consisting of one mole of mixture or feed of composition z i .
In general, this consists of:
L+V = 1
xi = yi = zi = 1
i
[EQ 8.83]
Lxi + Vy i = z i
[EQ 8.84]
Flash calculations
For a thermodynamic system to be in equilibrium it is further required that the fugacities in the
liquid and vapor phases must be equal for each component:
f iL = f iV
[EQ 8.85]
The equations [EQ 8.82] to [EQ 8.85] in the unknowns L , V , x i and yi may be solved to find
the equilibrium state of a system of known composition z i .
The fugacities are functions of temperature, pressure and composition (see "Equation of state
formulation" on page 317),
f i = f i ( T , p, x i)
316
Technical Description
Equation of state
The fugacities can be calculated directly from an equation of state. Defining equilibrium
constants K i for each component as:
y
K i = ----i
xi
the mole fractions of each component in the liquid and vapor phases are defined as:
zi
x i = -----------------------------------[ 1 + ( K i 1 )V ]
[EQ 8.86]
and
Ki zi
y i = -----------------------------------[ 1 + ( K i 1 )V ]
[EQ 8.87]
The flash calculation determining the equilibrium conditions in the two-phase region is
performed in two stages:
Use Michelsens stability criterion, [Ref. 16], to establish how many phases are present. The
stationary condition used to determine the Gibbs energy minimum is obtained using successive
substitution accelerated with the general dominant eigenvalue method, [Ref. 8], switched to
BFGS minimization near the minimum, [Ref. 9].
If two phases are present, solve the phase split calculation to obtain equal fugacity liquid and
vapor states. The solution variables used are Ji = log ( K i ) and the vapor mole fraction. The
stability check provides an initial set of values, which are refined using accelerated successive
substitutions, and finally solved using a full Newton-Raphson method.
In the case of finding a saturation pressure, that is a bubble point for an oil or a dew point for a
condensate, the same N -fugacity equations are used, [EQ 8.85], and a constraint based upon the
difference in the sum of vapor and liquid mole fractions, [EQ 8.83]. Rather than iterating to find
the vapor fraction, V , or liquid fraction L = 1 V , from [Ref. 1], V is set to 0 (zero - bubble
point) or 1 (one - dew point) and we vary pressure until the set of conditions is satisfied.
(RK) Redlich-Kwong
(SRK) Soave-Redlich-Kwong
(ZJ) Zudkevitch-Joffe
(PR) Peng-Robinson
The equations of state listed above are implemented using the formulation presented by Martin,
[Ref. 2], and Coats, [Ref. 3].
The equation of state for a real fluid is:
[EQ 8.88]
PV = nRTZ
where P is the pressure, V the volume, n the number of moles, R the universal gas constant, T
the temperature and Z is obtained from the solution of the cubic equation:
3
[EQ 8.89]
Z + E2 Z + E1 Z + E0 = 0
with
Technical Description
Equation of state
317
[EQ 8.90]
E 2 = ( m 1 + m 2 1 )B 1
2
[EQ 8.91]
E 1 = A ( 2 ( m 1 + m 2 ) 1 )B ( m 1 + m 2 )B
and
2
[EQ 8.92]
E 0 = [ AB + m 1 m 2 B ( B + 1 ) ]
Mnemonic
Equation of state
m1
RK
Redlich-Kwong
SRK
Soave-Redlich-Kwong
ZJ
Zudkevitch-Joffe
PR
Peng-Robinson
1+
m2
value
The cubic equation for the Z -factors may be solved to obtain Z -factors for liquid and vapor
phases. Generally three solutions are obtained. The distinction between the liquid and vapor
phase is then made by choosing the smallest root as the Z -factor for the liquid phase and the
largest root as the Z -factor for the vapor phase.
Fugacity coefficients are calculated using:
B
( Z + m2 B )
f
2S B
A
- + -----i ( Z 1 )
ln ------i - = ln ( Z B ) + ---------------------------- -------i -----i ln -----------------------px i
( m 1 m 2 )B A
( Z + m1 B )
B
B
[EQ 8.93]
where
Si =
Aij xj
n
A =
[EQ 8.94]
( xj xk Ajk )
[EQ 8.95]
j = 1k = 1
B =
( xj Bj )
[EQ 8.96]
j=1
A jk = ( 1 k jk ) ( A j A k )
1--2
[EQ 8.97]
and kjk are binary interaction coefficients, normally between hydrocarbons and nonhydrocarbons.
These four equations, [EQ 8.94] to [EQ 8.97], express the mixing laws used in all the equations
of state.
The variables A j and B j are defined by the following equations:
p rj
A j = A ( T, j ) -----2
T rj
318
Technical Description
Equation of state
[EQ 8.98]
and
p rj
B j = B ( T, j ) -----T rj
[EQ 8.99]
and B ( T, j ) used in equations [EQ 8.98] and [EQ 8.99] are functions of the acentric
factor and the reduced temperature T rj .
A ( T, j )
For Redlich-Kwong
1 -2
A ( T, j ) = A T rj
[EQ 8.100]
B ( T, j ) = B
[EQ 8.101]
For Soave-Redlich-Kwong
1
---
2
2
A ( T, j ) = A 1 + ( 0.48 + 1.57 j 0.17 j ) 1 T rj
0
B ( T, j ) = B
[EQ 8.102]
[EQ 8.103]
For Zudkevitch-Joffe
1--2
A ( T, j ) = A F aj ( T )T rj
[EQ 8.104]
B ( T, j ) = B F bj ( T )
[EQ 8.105]
For Peng-Robinson
1
---
2
2
A ( T, j ) = A 1 + ( 0.37464 + 1.54226 j 0.2669 j ) 1 T rj
0
B ( T, j ) = B
[EQ 8.106]
[EQ 8.107]
The normal PR form can be optionally modified for large acentric factor, using the factor
2
Table 8.8
Equation
RK, SRK, ZJ
0.4274802
0.086640350
PR
0.457235529
0.077796074
Technical Description
Equation of state
319
Note
In the program, these default values may be over-written on a component basis either
interactively, or by the use of the OMEGAA and OMEGAB keywords.
Zudkevitch-Joffe equation
The Zudkevitch-Joffe equation contains additional temperature factors, denoted F aj ( T ) and
F bj ( T ) , multiplying the usual RK temperature dependence. These are adjusted to match the purecomponent fugacity values along the vapor pressure line, and to observe the correct component
liquid density.
In the program the required variation of component saturation pressure and liquid density with
temperature are obtained using correlations of Reidel, and Gunn and Yamada. These
correlations require the input of the normal boiling point and the reference liquid density at a
specified reference temperature.
Surface tensions
The surface tension between the liquid and vapor phase of a multi-component mixture can be
estimated by the Macleod-Sugden relationship, [Ref. 18]:
1--4
mix
Nc
[ Pi ] ( m
Liq
Vap
[EQ 8.108]
xi m yi )
i=1
where [ P i ] is the parachor of the i th component, see [Ref. 18], which has a liquid and vapor mole
Vap
fraction of xi and yi respectively, and the liquid and vapor molar densities are Liq
m and m
respectively. If the parachors are assigned values consistent with [Ref. 18] and the molar
volumes are expressed in gmoles/ cm3 then the surface tension have units of dynes/cm.
In PVTi, this correction is available for the Peng-Robinson and the Soave-RedlichKwong Equation of State.
V mol,p =
EoS
V mol,p
zi ci
[EQ 8.109]
i=1
320
Technical Description
Equation of state
where:
EoS
V mol,p
z i = ( x i ,y i )
c ri
The component corrections are usually related to the set of dimensionless shift parameters, s i ,
by:
c ri
s i = ----bi
[EQ 8.110]
where:
RT ci
-.
b i = b, i ---------p ci
[EQ 8.111]
Shift parameters
No Temperature Dependence (None)
In the simplest case, where the Volume Shift dependence is None, the Shift parameters for the
inorganic and light hydrocarbon components are calculated using the temperature-dependent
correlations given by Sreide, [Ref. 34].
The functional form of these polynomials depends on whether the PR or SRK EOS is being used
and on whether the reduced temperature, Tr (= T T crit ) is less than or greater than 1. For this
simple case, where there is no temperature dependence on the Volume Shifts a value of Tr=0.7
is used in the equations.
In the case of the PR EOS the equation take the form:
si = T r 0.741
1.355
[EQ 8.112]
3.713
[EQ 8.113]
where, for each component, s i is the dimensionless Volume Shift, i the acentric factor and,
as mentioned above, T r =0.7.
For heavier components ( M w > 90 ) the shifts are estimated on a component by component basis
as the difference in the calculated single component molar volume using the two-parameter
Equation of State at the components reference pressure and temperature (often 60 F and 14.7
psia), and the reference molar volume (mole weight divided by reference density).
The shift parameters of the heavier components are potential regression variables and are added
to the allowed set if you request either the PR3 or the SRK3 Equation of State. Experience has
shown that simultaneous matches to saturation pressure and density can be achieved more easily
as a result, and therefore the use of these Equations of State in PVTi is recommended.
Technical Description
Equation of state
321
One obvious deficiency of this model is that the shift coefficients, ci , are only valid at one
temperature. If one attempts to model the change of molar volume of a pure component, such
as Hexane, with temperature using, say, the PR3 Equation of State, and compares that against
the known thermal expansion coefficient, see [Ref. 18], one will find a discrepancy.
In an attempt to overcome this deficiency, two options have been added to PVTi whereby
temperature-dependence is introduced using differing methods which are now outlined.
Linear Expansion Only
In this model, the volume shifts of all the components are modified with a linear thermal
expansion coefficient, , using the equation:
[EQ 8.114]
c i ( T ) = c ri ( T ri, P ri ) [ 1 + i ( T T ri ) ]
where cri ( T ri, P ri ) for a particular component is the dimensional volume shift specified in
equation [EQ 8.109]. Physically these cri coefficients correspond to the difference in volume of
1 mole of a particular component at temperature T and pressure P (pressure at standard
conditions - usually 60F), and 1 mole of that component at its reference temperature and
pressure, T ri and P ri .
The i coefficients are determined using a formula which is a fitted functional (of mole weights)
of the first ten paraffins from [Ref. 17] and is given by:
[EQ 8.115]
is a special regression function in PVTi, and takes the default value of 0.0005 C 1 ,
determined from a fit to a crude oil. Physically, it represents a thermal expansion factor, and has
keyword THERMX within PVTi.
Polynomial Correlations
If the temperature dependence of the Volume Shifts is set to Polynomial Correlations then the
equations of Soreide are used which were introduced in the case of Tr<1 in equations [EQ 8.109]
and [EQ 8.109]. When the None option was set we always set Tr=0.7 and so these equations
were fine. However, if a temperature above Tc is supplied to the algorithm with the Polynomial
Correlations option set so that Tr>1, then PVTi chooses from a set of equations depending on
the mole weight of the component. These equations can be found in [Ref. 34].
Note
For heavier components ( M w > 90 ) the thermal expansion scheme outlined in the "Linear
Expansion Only" on page 322 is applied. However, since the scheme is now applied to regions
where the fitted functional i is no longer valid, i is set to unity, and the thermal expansion
factor, , applies directly. For this reason it is often a good choice as a regression variable for
heavy hydrocarbon components if one is finding difficulty matching liquid densities.
The Linear Expansion Only model has some advantages in that since the modification to
volume shifts is linear, the volume shifts may be regressed for all components.
For the Polynomial Correlations model, since the correlations of Sreide are not linear, you
cannot regress the shift parameters of lighter components to which the correlations have been
applied.
322
Technical Description
Equation of state
Hint
Note
If the volume shifts are Dependent, then they are calculated so that the calculated
reference density (the density at the reference temperature and standard conditions
pressure) is guaranteed to match the observed value. This means that the volume shifts
are dependent on the critical properties and acentric factor of the component. If the
volume shifts are Independent this guarantee is broken and the volume shifts can be
varied during regression. In this situation they are not affected by changes in the
critical properties or acentric factors.
Multiphase flash
Standard algorithm
The conventional two phase flash calculation starts with a stability test for the feed composition,
based on Michelsens (1982) stability criterion, . If unstable, a flash phase split calculation is
performed to determine the two phase compositions. The multiphase flash continues in a stepwise fashion: if any one of the current N phases exhibits instability, an N+1 phase flash split
calculation is performed, the resulting tested for stability. The maximum allowed number of
phases is five, after that is reach no more phases are split off.
The standard method. This method is the one that was in use for the 2002A release and
initially assumes a single phase equal to the feed. Stability checks are performed and
subsequent phases are split off if the system is unstable.
Instead of the flash starting with the feed an initial guess/guesses can be used assuming
there are 4 phases present, which are initially undetermined.
Stability analysis
The stability of each phase present in a multiphase regime can be tested with the Michelsen
analysis, [Ref. 16], precisely as for the two phase case, using the Gibbs energy tangent plane
distance criterion. However, the initial estimates for phases that will be split off are not limited
to the vapor/liquid equilibrium phases characterised by the Wilson K-values: additional
estimates are chosen from the following phases:
Lightest hydrocarbon
Heaviest hydrocarbon
Technical Description
Equation of state
323
Ideal gas
The solutions method used for Michelsen stability criterion is a Successive substitution with
GDEM (general dominant eigenvalue method) follow by BFGS if that does not work. These
trial phases are tested in turn until one indicates instability, in which case the whole system is
unstable, and the algorithm proceeds to split of that phase, provided that phase does not already
exist. If none of the trial phase indicates instability, the state is assumed to be stable.
Systems of Equations
Material Balance, Mass conservation equations or consistency equations
Consider a hydrocarbon system consisting of one mole of mixture or feed of composition { z i }.
In general, this will consist of { m } moles from each of the M phases, with composition { z im },
at some pressure P and temperature T.
Mass conservation gives:
m = 1
[EQ 8.116]
zim = 1
[EQ 8.117]
m zim = zi
[EQ 8.118]
These consistency rules can be checked at the end of the multiphase flash calculation.
Defining the multiphase equilibrium K-values as:
z ij
K ij = ---------z ir ( i )
Where r ( i ) is the reference phase index chosen for component i, usually so that the largest
amount of component i is in the reference phase.
Gibbs Energy Stationary Conditions
The solution of the multiphase flash satisfies the consistency equations and is the absolute
minimum of the Gibbs free energy.
The reduced Gibbs energy of an M phase system is written as:
G- =
g = -----RT
324
Technical Description
Equation of state
mzim ln ( fim )
i
[EQ 8.119]
th
th
[EQ 8.120]
= z j ( ln z jk ln z jr ( j ) + ln jk ln jr ( j ) )
[EQ 8.121]
= z j ( ln K jk + ln jk ln jr ( j ) )
[EQ 8.122]
where jk is the fugacity coefficient of component j in the kth phase. In equilibrium, the Gibbs
energy is at a minimum, and the first order stationary condition thus implies fugacity balance
between like components in all phases.
The second derivative of the Gibbs free energy is:
mk mK ij
ln im
- ------- 1 + ----------------g = z i z j -----------------------
m z
z
im
Mk MK ij
ln iM
- -------- 1 + ----------------- ------------------------
z
M
z jM
iM
im
ln im
-
zpm ----------------z pm
p
ln iM
-
zpM -----------------z pM
p
update the compositions. Checking to see solution is consistent, that is mole fractions have
to add up to one.
The algorithm has two attempts at converging to a local minimum. First method updates with
direct or successive substitution with GDEM of the J-values. If it does not converge that is the
fugacity balance equation residuals fails to meet a specified tolerance, it proceeding to a try
continuing the convergence with Newton-Raphson/Murray method.
Successive Substitution (SS)
The SS part incorporates the General Dominant Eigenvalue Method (GDEM) acceleration
algorithm. For details see Crowe and Nishio. The variable used are the J-values themselves,
updated from the second form of the first derivative given in equations [EQ 8.120], [EQ 8.121]
and [EQ 8.122]. The reference phase for each component is chosen as the phase with the highest
mole fraction of that component, so as to scale each K value close to and below one.
Technical Description
Equation of state
325
Newton-Raphson (NR)
The NR part uses a Murray decomposition of the Gibbs Hessian to ensure positive definiteness
of the Jacobian, and therefore progress towards a minimum. Occasionally, a cubic trace back
augmented line search in the Newton direction indicated is required when the Gibbs free energy
is found not to decrease.
The variables used are the scaled mole numbers, and the reference phase is the same as in the
SS, that is, the phase with the highest mole fraction.
Trace Elements
If a phase possesses a near-zero component composition, then the variable for that component
and phase can be dropped from the variable list (that is not changed in the SS or NR) and its
value calculated after each iteration by invoking fugacity balance between it and the fugacity of
a variable that was update in the usual way. In doing so, the trace element fugacity coefficient
is calculate by setting its composition to zero. If the component transcends the numerical zero
boundary, its variable is reintroduced into the variable set ready for the next iteration.
Liquid-Liquid Initiation
It was found that for a flash with wax that the wax initial guess did give a lower Gibbs free
energy some of the time. For the wax initial guess we assume the composition of the liquid
phase is the same as the feed. We then workout based on the wax, heavier liquid and vapor K
values by:
o
[EQ 8.123]
ln x 2i = ln x i + ln i, L ( x i ) ln i, L
[EQ 8.124]
[EQ 8.125]
ln y i = ln x i + ln i, V ( x i ) ln i, L
ln x 3i = ln x i + ln i, W ( x i ) ln i, L
o
where denotes pure fugacity, L,V and W denote liquid, vapor and wax. y i component in the
vapor phase. x i , x 2i and x 3i are the components in the lightest liquid, the heavier liquid and
the wax phase.
326
Technical Description
Equation of state
Both result using the initial guess and standard algorithm can pass the stability test, so in the
multiphase where it is possible for wax to form, we do both the four phase wax initial guess and
the standard multiphase flash and compare results, taking the one with the lowest Gibbs free
energy.
In the case of the debug option switching on all the initial guesses and in the case for the wax
possible case fail to give an answer which pass the stability test, then all initial guesses are tried
and compared and the result with the minimum Gibbs free energy taken as the answer.
Lattice-gas models
Lattice-gas models and local composition models have attracted attention through their strong
theoretical basis, incorporating hydrogen-bonding and electrolyte thermodynamics
respectively. Relaxation of the commonly used symmetry condition for ij s yielding different
mixing rules, is attractive for similar reasons. As yet though, these approaches have found little
application, and are not easily incorporated into existing Equation of State packages.
Henrys Law, based essential on look-up fugacites for given solutes and solvent, has had a
longer history of application to engineering rule-of-thumb problem, but is difficult to
incorporate in a GEM multiphase algorithm, requires significant amounts of data, uses nonexact models for pressure and salinity corrections, and is restricted to specific solvents and
solutes.
The Valderrrama-Patel-Teja Equation of State is a 3 degree Equation of State that has extra
terms involving the compressibility factor, and has had some success in dealing with water
systems. Again, this has not had wide use, and again, has still to be corrected for salinity. The
most common approach in the literature is to use the more popular Equations of State, but with
some modification, particularly to the ij s used. The Peng-Robinson Equation of State has
received this treatment, using T-dependent ij s between water and most SCN groups. The
PRW Equation of State is used here details are given in "Peng-Robinson and Water Equation
of State" on page 328.
The multiphase flash allow three separate treatments for systems containing water that produce
a water phase, each based on the PRW Equation of State:
Technical Description
Equation of state
327
If the given system contains water the stability analysis attempts specifically to split off a water
phase before any other. A full Michelsen stability analysis is not required:- each of the above
options describe a water-dominated phase, so it is enough to compare the activity of water in a
pure water phase with that in the feed mixture, and reintroduce the impurities required by the
option at a later stage. In terms of fugacities, a pure water phase will split off if and only if
fugacity of water in the feed is greater than fugacity of a pure water
f w ( feed ) > fw ( pure )
) or:
Water- CO 2 bic-fitting
A particular modification to the use of PWR Equation of State is made when only CO2 is
dissolved in water, in allowing for salinity effect CO 2 solubility decrease with salinity, but the
PRW Equation of State makes no allowance for this. It has been possible, however, to establish
a polynomial form for the H 2 O CO 2 ij by iterating adjusting (with a NR scheme) the
H 2 O CO 2 ij until the solubility predicted by the flash calculation matches experimentally
determined solubilities. With a set of such ij s one can fit a 3 degree surface polynomial in p,
T, S (salinity):
H2 O CO2 = f1 P, T ) + Sf 2 P, T )
fi = a 1i + a 2i T + a 3i P + a4i TP + a 5i T
2
+a 6i P + a 7i T P + a 9i T + a 10i P
xi xj ( 1 ij )( ai aj )
i
b =
12
xi bi
i
a i = a ci i
2 2
R T ci
a ci = 0.45724 --------------P ci
328
Technical Description
Equation of state
12
12
= 1 + ( 1 Tr
)
2
Two modification are made for water systems. Firstly, for the water component in any phase, a
correction is made to improve predicted water vapor pressures:
12
= 1.0085677 + 0.82514 ( 1 Tr
12
when T r
12
< 0.85
xi xj ( 1 ij ( T ) )( ai aj )
i
12
when Tr 0.85 , or the phase is not the aqueous liquid phase, the original PR Equation of State
is used.
The temperature ij s required may be found from the published curves given by Peng &
Robinson. The following forms have been derived:
C1 H2 O = 1.659Tr P rw 0.761
C2 H2 O = 2.109Tr P rw 0.607
2 2
Viscosity correlations
Three correlations are available in PVTi for the estimation of viscosities, namely that due to
"Lohrenz, Bray and Clark" on page 330, [Ref. 7], the method due to "Pedersen et al." on
page 331 (PED), [Ref. 5] and [Ref. 36], and also that of "Aasberg-Petersen et al" on page 333,
[Ref. 63].
Technical Description
Equation of state
329
[ ( ) + 10 ]
[EQ 8.126]
= a1 + a2 r + a3 r + a4 r + a5 r
where
a 1 = 0.1023000
a 2 = 0.0233640
a 3 = 0.0585330
a 4 = 0.0407580
[EQ 8.127]
a 5 = 0.0093324
and is the low-pressure gas mixture viscosity. is the viscosity-reducing parameter, which
for a fluid mixture is given by:
16
1 2
z i T ci
i=1
2 3
z i M wi
i=1
[EQ 8.128]
z i p ci
i=1
1
c = V c =
i = 1, i C
( z i V ci ) + z C
7+
V cC
7+
7+
[EQ 8.129]
7+
7+
7+
[EQ 8.130]
7+
The dilute gas mixture viscosity is as given by Herning and Zippener, [Ref. 28]:
N
N
12
z i i M wi
i=1
12
z i M wi
[EQ 8.131]
i=1
where the dilute gas viscosities of the individual components, i are derived from expressions
due to Stiel and Thodos, [Ref. 29]:
5 1 0.94
i = 34 10 ---- T ri
i
[EQ 8.132]
T ri < 1.5
5 1
0.625
i = 17.78 10 ---- ( 4.58T ri 1.67 )
i
T ri > 1.5
[EQ 8.133]
where
16
1 2 2 3
i = T ci M wi p ci
330
Technical Description
Equation of state
[EQ 8.134]
Hint
By making the viscosity a function of the fourth power of density, results are very
sensitive to small differences in estimation of density. It is not unusual for this
technique to predict a viscosity only 50% of the measured viscosity. Small changes in
critical volumes or critical Z -factors remedy the error but it is recommended that they
are changed as a single group, from [EQ 8.130].
Pedersen et al.
Viscosities can be calculated from a modified form of the corresponding states method. A group
of substances obey the corresponding states principle if the functional dependence of the
reduced viscosity, r , say, on reduced density and temperature, r and T r , say, is the same for
all components within the group, namely:
[EQ 8.135]
r ( , T ) = f ( r ,T r )
in which case comprehensive viscosity data is only needed for one component of the group,
which is denoted as the reference substance, to be given the subscript ( o ) all other components
are identified with the subscript ( x ).
Generally, the critical viscosity, c , is not known but it can be estimated from the inverse of [EQ
8.135]),
1 2 2 3 1 2
Vc Mw
[EQ 8.136]
r ( , T ) = ( , T )T c
Thus, the viscosity of component x at temperature T and a pressure with density , is given by:
12
2 3
12
T cx V cx M wx
- ------------- ------------ ( ,T )
r ( ,T ) = ---------T co V co M mo o o o
[EQ 8.137]
r = = ------------------------------------1 6 2 3 1 2
Tc pc Mw
[EQ 8.138]
The deviation from the simple corresponding states principle is expressed in terms of a
rotational coupling coefficient, denoted , to give:
1 6
23
12
T c, mix
p c, mix M w, mix mix
---------------------- ------------------------- ----------- o ( p o, T o )
mix ( p, T ) = -----------------------T co
p co
M wo
o
[EQ 8.139]
where
p co o
p o = p ------------------------p c, mix mix
[EQ 8.140]
T co o
T o = T ------------------------T c, mix mix
[EQ 8.141]
The critical temperature and volume for unlike pairs of molecules are given by:
Technical Description
Equation of state
331
T c, ij = ( T c, i T c, j )
12
[EQ 8.142]
13 3
1 13
V c, ij = --- ( V c, i + V c, j )
8
[EQ 8.143]
where the critical volume of a component can be expressed in terms of the critical temperature
and pressure using the real gas law and the critical Z -factor.
Assuming a constant Z c for all components,[EQ 8.143] becomes:
T c, i 1 3 T c, j 1 3 3
1
V c, ij = --- constant -------+ ---------
8
p c, i
p c, j
[EQ 8.144]
zi zj Tc, ij Vc, ij
[EQ 8.145]
i = 1j = 1
T c, mix = ------------------------------------------------N N
zi zj Vc, ij
i = 1j = 1
zi zj
c, i
T
------- p c, i
13
c, j
T
------- p c, j
13 3
[ T c, i T c, j ]
12
= 1j = 1
T c, mix = i---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------N N
T c, i 1 3 T c, j 1 3 3
--------z i z j -------p c, i p c, j
[EQ 8.146]
i = 1j = 1
zi zj
c, i
T
------- p c, i
13
c, j
T
------- p c, j
13 3
[ T c, i T c, j ]
12
i = 1j = 1
p c, mix = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------2
N N
T c, i 1 3 T c, j 1 3 3
z i z j --------- ---------
p c, i
p c, j
i = 1 j = 1
[EQ 8.147]
M w, mix = 1.304 10 ( M w
2.303
Mn
2.303
) + Mn
[EQ 8.148]
where M w and M n are the weight average and number average mole weights, respectively.
This mixing rule is derived empirically on the basis of available viscosity data and assigns a
larger influence to heavier components.
The -parameter for the mixture is found from:
3 1.847
0.5173
M w, mix
[EQ 8.149]
0 = 1.0 + 0.031 r
332
Technical Description
Equation of state
[EQ 8.150]
Note
The constants and exponents in equations [EQ 8.149] and [EQ 8.150] have been found
from fitting to experimentally determined viscosity data.
It has been our experience that the method of Pedersen gives much better prediction of
viscosities than does the method of Lohrenz, Bray and Clark. Neither method is particularly
good but typical errors based on un-regressed Equation of State data are, LBC 50 % and
PED 90 % of the reported values. However, you should treat experimentally measured
viscosities with some caution, as viscosities are often calculated.
Aasberg-Petersen et al
The Aasberg-Petersen model is also based on the principle of corresponding states, but uses two
references fluids, methane and decane, instead of just the one (methane) in the case of the
Pedersen et al. model. The usual problem with the Pedersen model is that inaccurate predictions
occur for fluids with components that are significantly different in molecular weight to the
reference component (methane).
The idea of this model is to use a heavier second reference component and effectively create an
optimum reference component by using the molecular weight of the fluid as an interpolation
parameter between the two reference components. Decane is chosen as the second reference
component because it is the heaviest alkane for which a significant amount of experimental
viscosity data is known. Methane is a natural choice as the first reference component because
of its presence in large mole fractions in most reservoir fluid mixtures
The interpolation law is used to calculate the reduced viscosity of the optimum reference
component (denoted with the subscript x) using the reduced viscosities of methane and decane
and is obtained using the following expression:
MW x MW 1 r2
- ln -------ln rx = ln r1 + -----------------------------MW2 MW1 r1
[EQ 8.151]
MW is the molecular weight and subscripts 1 and 2 refer to the reference components. The
functional form of equation [EQ 8.151] was originally suggested by Teja and Rice (1981), [Ref.
64], using the acentric factor instead of MW. This is not possible in the present work, since the
acentric factor decreases with increasing molecular weight for heavy oil fractions.
The reduced properties are determined from:
E
Er = -----, E = T, P,
Ec
[EQ 8.152]
Subscripts r and c indicated reduced and critical properties respectively. The following
expression is used to evaluate the critical viscosity (Pedersen et al. 1989):
c =
1
--- 2
--- 1
--2 3 6
C MW P c Tc
[EQ 8.153]
C is a constant. From equations [EQ 8.151] and [EQ 8.142][EQ 8.142] the following equations
may be derived for determination of the viscosity:
cx 1 ( T 1, P 1 ) 2 ( T 2, P2 )c1 K
- ---------------------------------x = --------------------------------c1
1 ( T 1, P1 )c2
[EQ 8.154]
MW x MW 1
K = -----------------------------MW2 MW1
[EQ 8.155]
Technical Description
Equation of state
333
1 and 2 are evaluated at conditions corresponding to the reduced temperature and pressure of
component x:
T ci T
Ti = ---------, i = 1, 2
T cx
[EQ 8.156]
P ci P
- , i = 1, 2
Pi = ---------P cx
[EQ 8.157]
The model outlined in the above is extended to mixtures using the same mixing rule as the
Pedersen et al. model, that is equations [EQ 8.146] and [EQ 8.147]. The mixture molecular
weight is calculated using the formula:
MWmix = MW n + 0.00867358 ( MW w
1.56079
MW n
1.56079
where
[EQ 8.158]
[EQ 8.159]
N
2
zi MWi
=1
MWw = i------------------------N
zi MWi
i=1
and
N
ziMWi
MW n =
[EQ 8.160]
i=1
The constants in equation [EQ 8.142] are determined by regression using experimental viscosity
data for binary mixtures and oils.
The following equations are used for determination of the viscosity of the reference
components:
0 = k ( T ) + 1 ( T ) + 2 ( , T )
9
k ( T ) =
GVi T
(------------i 4 -)
3
[EQ 8.161]
[EQ 8.162]
i=1
T
1 ( T ) = A + B C ln ---
F
j
2 ( T, ) = H 2 exp j1 + ---4-
T
H 2 = 1 + exp
where
334
Technical Description
Equation of state
[EQ 8.163]
[EQ 8.164]
j3
j
j7
0.5
- + j5 + ---6- + ---- j2 + -------1.5
T T 2
T
0.1
[EQ 8.165]
[EQ 8.166]
( c )
= -----------------c
These equations were originally developed by Hanley et al. (1975), [Ref. 65], to correlate the
methane viscosity. For methane the values of the GVi parameters in equation [EQ 8.152] given
by Hanley et al. were maintained. For decane GV4-GV9 are equal to zero and GV1-GV3 were
taken from the DIPPR tables (1985). All the parameters in equations [EQ 8.59]-[EQ 8.165] were
estimated. In Table 8.9, data of the parameter estimation are given and Table 8.10 lists all
parameters for the pure component viscosity correlation. Of the parameters in Table 8.10 are
used the viscosity is obtained in P if the density is given in g/cm3.
Table 8.9
Methane
Decane
881
252
T-range (K)
91-523
244-477
P-range (atm.)
0-680
0-1000
Dev. (%)
3.1
3.8
Table 8.10
Decane
GV1
-209097
0.2640
GV2
264276
0.9487
GV3
-147282
71.0
GV4
47164
0.0
GV5
-9491.9
0.0
GV6
1220.0
0.0
GV7
-96.28
0.0
GV8
4.274
0.0
GV9
-0.0814
0.0
A.100
23946
0.00248
343.79
81.35
0.4487
5.9583
168.0
490.0
j1
-22.768
-11.739
j2
30.574
16.092
j3
-14929
-18464
Technical Description
Equation of state
335
Table 8.10
Decane
j4
1061.5
-811.3
j5
-1.4748
1.9745
j6
290.62
898.45
j7
30396
119620
The density of the reference components as a function of the pressure and temperature is also
required in equations [EQ 8.48] and [EQ 8.165]. For methane, as with the Pedersen model, the
33-parameter MBWR-equation given by McCarthy (1974), [Ref. 66], was used to calculate the
density. For decane we decided to used the flash available within PVTi to obtain the density at
a given pressure and temperature.
Finally, the following physical properties for methane and decane were used in Table 8.11 below
when required.
Table 8.11
Decane
Tc
190.55
617.40
Pc
45.39
20.18
MW
16.043
142.284
0.008
0.484
0.1649
0.2269
The predictions of the Aasberg-Petersen model have been shown to agree well with
experimental data over large pressure and temperature ranges. In particular this model is able to
handle mixtures with CO2, paraffinic and aromatic components with better accuracy than the
Pedersen model. A better match is also obtained than the Pedersen model for heavier oils, where
the size and shape of the molecules differ substantially from the single reference component
(methane).
Note
It should be noted that the Aasberg-Petersen model is not recommended for fluids with
large concentrations of napthalenic components.
336
Technical Description
Equation of state
[EQ 8.167]
Eitherway, they might be thought of as the fiddle-factors for the equation of state. Strictly, they
should be determined for all possible binary mixtures of hydrocarbons and non-hydrocarbons
by tuning their value to get a match between experimental and theoretical (Equation of State)
behavior. Thus, each new Equation of State requires that a completely new set of binaries be
developed: a laborious task indeed. This is the main reason why the Soave-Redlich-Kwong and
Peng-Robinson Equations of State tend to dominate in reservoir applications.
Caution
Many authors have suggested that binaries are the obvious Equation of State
parameter to adjust to match Equation of State to laboratory results, especially the
Methane to plus-fraction binary. However, Pedersen et al., [Ref. 30], have shown
that this is problematic.
Given that our preferred Equation of State is the Peng-Robinson, we derive binaries from one
of two sources.
The current default is to assume they are zero for all hydrocarbon-hydrocarbon interactions
except for Methane to heavier hydrocarbons that vary like:
KC
1,
[EQ 8.168]
= 0.14 j 0.06
where j is the (liquid) specific gravity of the heavier component. In addition, the hydrocarbon
to non-hydrocarbon interactions take certain fixed values, see [Ref. 4].
The alternative set, activated by the appropriate option switch is a set due to Cheuh and
Prausnitz, see [Ref. 32].
The hydrocarbon to non-hydrocarbon interactions are as above but the hydrocarbon to
hydrocarbon binaries are given by:
2 ( V c, i V c, j ) 1 6
-
K i, j = A 1 --------------------------------- V 1c, i3 + V 1c, j3
[EQ 8.169]
where V c, i is the molar volume of the i th component and A is a special regression variable which
is generally in the range 0.15 A 0.25 .
There is some appeal in using the pre-multiplying coefficient to regress all binaries together.
This preserves symmetry, which might be lost using the Methane to plus fraction binary
approach of [EQ 8.169], which (see [EQ 8.169] and [Ref. 28]) can lead to strange results.
These particular binaries are also given a temperature dependence by the use of an additional
multiplying factor that has the form:
[EQ 8.170]
1.0 + TC ( T T std )
Technical Description
Equation of state
337
Blackoil systems
Essentially two experiments are performed on black or crude oil systems:
Having charged the PVT cell with the reservoir fluid, the system is left to come into
equilibrium at the required (reservoir) temperature and pressure or some higher pressure
where the fluid is a single phase liquid, whereupon the fluid volume is noted.
The pressure is then dropped (at constant temperature) and the new fluid volume is
recorded. The bubble point pressure is then readily found from the discontinuity in the
pressure/volume relationship where the first bubble of gas is evolved from the liquid. Since
gases are more compressible than liquids, reduction in pressure and liberation of gas results
in an increase in rate of volume expansion of the (two phase) fluid.
PVTi
338
PVTi finds the bubble point by taking one mole of the reservoir fluid and using estimates
for the K -values, constructs vapor compositions at a set of pressures, testing for the stability
of the second (vapor) phase using the method of Michelsen [Ref. 16].
Once the highest-pressure, two-phase state has been found, the N equal fugacity conditions
and the one mole fraction constraint (see "Material balance" on page 316 and "Flash
calculations" on page 316) are used to solve for the N + 1 unknowns of N K -values and the
bubble point pressure by iteration.
Technical Description
Basic laboratory experiments
Differential liberation
Having found the bubble point pressure, the crude oil would normally then be subject to this
experiment.
Laboratory experiment
1
Starting from the bubble point pressure, the pressure is dropped by several hundred psia,
whereupon a volume of gas is evolved that is removed from the cell at the (new) constant
pressure. This process is repeated several times noting the volume of gas evolved (at
reservoir and surface conditions) and the volume of liquid remaining.
The volume of liquid remaining at the last stage, which should be at standard or
atmospheric pressure, is then reduced to standard or atmospheric temperature and remeasured. This liquid is discharged and its density is obtained. The density of the liquid at
the other pressure (and temperature) stages can be calculated from mass balance knowing
the volumes and molecular weight of the removed gas streams.
The data usually quoted is:
Bo
Bg
Rs
Gas-oil ratio
Oil density
Zg
Oil viscosity
Gas viscosity
where:
Vo ( p )
B o ( p ) = ------------std
Vo
[EQ 8.171]
Vg ( p )
B g ( p ) = ---------------std
Vg ( p )
[EQ 8.172]
i = std
1R s ( p ) = -------std
Vo
Vg
std
[EQ 8.173]
(i)
i=p
and
Mg ( p )
g = --------------M air
[EQ 8.174]
Here, Vo , Vg are volumes of oil and gas, M g , M air are mole weights of hydrocarbon gas and
air, the superscript std implies standard conditions, and the summation for the gas-oil ratio
is taken over the volumes of evolved gas from the current pressure, p to the final pressure
at std .
Technical Description
Basic laboratory experiments
339
PVTi
1
In PVTi, the experiment is simulated by firstly locating the bubble point pressure, as above.
Then one mole of bubble point fluid is dropped in pressure and a flash calculation is
performed to determine the phase split and the volumes of oil and gas. All the gas is
removed and the liquid composition forms the feedstream for the next pressure depletion
stage, etc.
Note
The "Definition of GOR in Diff. Lib." on page 148 program option allows three further
definitions of the GOR.
The first removes the stage to standard conditions and normalizes gas volumes to the
volume of oil at reservoir conditions, that is:
i = plast
1
R s ( p ) = --------------------------V o ( T, p bub )
std
[EQ 8.175]
Vg ( i )
i=p
where T is the temperature of the depletion experiment, and p last is the last pressure stage
specified.
2
The second definition specifies the GOR as an incremental one, that is:
std
Vg ( p )
R s ( p ) = ---------------std
Vo
[EQ 8.176]
The third definition is the same as the default but the volume of oil is at its bubble point
pressure rather than at stock tank conditions, that is:
i = std
1
R s ( p ) = --------------------------V o ( T, p bub )
Vg
std
[EQ 8.177]
(i)
i=p
The program option "Definition of Oil relative volume in Diff. Lib." on page 149 allows an
alternative definition of the oil relative volume where the volume of oil is normalized to the
initial volume of oil at reservoir rather than standard conditions:
Vo ( p )
B o ( p ) = --------------------------V o ( T, p bub )
[EQ 8.178]
Hint
340
Technical Description
Basic laboratory experiments
Most condensate systems are relatively compressible above the dew point so that the
appearance of a heavier, less-compressible second liquid phase cannot be identified on a
pressure/volume relationship. This means the dew point must be found by eye, by visual
determination of the pressure when the first drop of liquid is formed in the cell.
Note
PVTi
In PVTi, this experiment is simulated in much the same way as the bubble point evaluation
except that the trial second (liquid) phase is heavier than the original fluid.
1
The same stability test is done to find the highest two phase state and the same set of
equations and variables iterated to solution.
As an alternative to this high-pressure dew point, usually referred to as the retrograde dew
point, the low-pressure or normal dew point can be found by starting low in pressure and
iterating higher.
It consists of varying the pressure and measuring the resulting volume of the single phase
fluid above saturation pressure, and volumes of vapor and liquid (and total) phases below it.
For the single phase state, the vapor Z -factor or liquid density can be calculated from the
other fluid properties.
These data items are reported along with the relative volume, being the volume of the fluid at
any given pressure per the volume of the fluid at the saturation pressure.
PVTi
In PVTi, the CCE is simulated by:
1
Finding the saturation pressure which for one mole of feedstream defines the cell or control
volume.
Then at pressures above the saturation pressure it is sufficient to find the single phase liquid
or vapor Z -factor to calculate the volumetric behavior.
Below the saturation pressure, the feedstream is flashed at each required pressure stage to
determine the phase split and other volumetric properties.
Technical Description
Basic laboratory experiments
341
It consists of starting with a volume of fluid at its saturation pressure, which again defines
the cell or control volume for the experiment.
Then the pressure is dropped by several hundred psia, or so, whereupon the fluid becomes
two phase and expands in volume.
Any excess volume over and above the cell volume is removed by taking off gas which is
analysed compositionally and volumetrically as well as noting the number of moles.
In addition, the percentage of liquid in the remaining fluid, the cell volume, defines the
liquid saturation.
Liquid saturation;
N pro :
Z gas :
y i, j :
and occasionally:
x i, N :
vap
M N+ :
vap
N+ :
PVTi
In PVTi this experiment is simulated by:
1
First finding the saturation pressure. The volume occupied by one mole of fluid at its
saturation pressure then defines the cell or control volume.
At some pressure less than the saturation pressure, the fluid is flashed into two phases and
any excess gas is removed to return the volume to the control volume.
The composition of the remaining fluid is calculated by volumetric balance and this forms
the feedstream for the next pressure stage, and so on.
Process simulation
For the purposes of process-type simulation and/or for the definition of blackoil tables for
reservoir modeling, separator tests are performed to see what phase splits are achieved when a
fluid is flashed at a series of pressures and temperatures in some prescribed sequence.
342
Technical Description
Basic laboratory experiments
Laboratory experiment
1
Most laboratory analyses consist of the reservoir fluid being flashed in a cell at some
specified pressure and temperature, and (generally) the liquid output being fed to a second
(and possibly third) cell at some reduced pressure and temperature: the last stage cell
usually being at standard conditions.
Volumes of gas evolved from each stage are generally collected together and the properties
of the resulting mixture are quoted/evaluated at standard conditions.
PVTi
1
In PVTi this process is simulated by a set of flash calculations at the required set of
pressures and temperatures, taking the reservoir fluid as the feedstream and routing the
liquid and vapor outputs to other stages.
The default output streams are liquid to the next stage and vapor to the stock-tank
accumulation, but PVTi is capable of solving feedback loops, where, for example, vapor
output is routed back to an earlier stage.
In addition, a user option allows the output streams to be split and directed to more than one
other stage.
Optimized separators
In the Fluid Properties (FPE) workflow, PVTi offers the automatic generation of the optimum
separator configuration for a fluid. The optimum separator configuration is defined as the twostage separator for which the stock-tank formation volume factor (Bo) is minimized.
Given the reservoir temperature and the maximum separator pressure, the following separator
chain is constructed:
1
A separator stage at some temperature below the reservoir temperature and some pressure
below the highest separator pressure. This stage is optimized.
A second stage at standard conditions, the liquid output from Stage 1 passes into this second
stage.
The stock tank. The vapor output from Stages 1 and 2 both pass into the vapor stock tank
and the liquid output from Stage 2 passes into the liquid stock tank.
A special regression procedure is used to determine the optimum temperature and pressure for
Stage 1, such that Bo is minimized in the stock tank. This point coincides with minimum Total
Gas-Oil Ratio and minimum stock tank vapor Gravity.
Note
For more information on fluid properties estimation see "Fluid Properties Estimation" on
page 384.
Technical Description
Basic laboratory experiments
343
In addition, PVTi has available: a ternary diagram, and first and multiple contact minimum
miscibility pressure experiments by one-cell simulation.
Note
Swelling test
Laboratory experiment
1
The swelling test consists of finding the saturation pressure and hence volume of a reservoir
fluid.
Followed by adding, in a series of steps, prescribed volumes (or moles) of lean injection
gas, re-pressuring the resulting mixture to return to a single phase system and measuring
the new saturation pressure and volume.
The data quoted is the set of saturation pressures for the original fluid and the mixtures and the
ratio of the saturation volume of the mixtures to the saturation volume of the original fluid,
usually referred to as the swelling factor.
PVTi
In PVTi this is simulated by:
1
Firstly finding the saturation pressure of one mole of the required reservoir fluid and hence
the saturation volume.
Then prescribed volumes of a lean injection gas are added as a GOR (volume of injection
gas at standard conditions per volume of original reservoir fluid at its Psat or other
prescribed pressure) or a mole% (moles of lean gas per moles of mixture) to give a new
fluid composition.
The saturation pressure and volume of the new mixture are found, and hence the swelling
factor.
Vaporization test
This is similar to the swelling test, except that it is performed at constant volume and pressure.
Laboratory experiment
1
A volume of reservoir fluid at some pressure and temperature, usually below the saturation
pressure and hence two phase, is contacted by a series of lean gas injections.
After each contact, a volume of (enriched) gas and/or liquid is removed to return the system
to the original volume. The composition of the removed gas is measured.
The experiment seeks to measure the extent of vaporization of intermediate and heavy
components from the reservoir liquid phase by stripping into the injected gas stream.
In PVTi, the procedure is as follows.
1
344
One mole of reservoir fluid at a prescribed pressure and temperature is flashed to calculate
the phase split and volumes of liquid and vapor.
Technical Description
Basic laboratory experiments
Lean gas is then added in a series of steps of moles, to give a new mixture composition
which is flashed at the same pressure and temperature, and any excess fluid volume
removed.
The composition of the removed stream is noted and the resulting mixture is then subject
to further lean gas injections.
In condensing drive mode the initial reservoir oil (the mole fraction can be specified) is
contacted with one mole of injection gas at a specified temperature and pressure.
This mixture is then flashed and a specified fraction of the resulting oil is then contacted
with one mole of the initial injection gas. This process is repeated at each stage of the test.
The vaporizing drive follows the same procedure as that of the condensing drive except that it
is a specified fraction of the resulting gas from each flash that is contacted with one mole of
reservoir oil.
A special ternary plot is available for this experiment that plots the compositions at each stage
of the oil and gas resulting from each flash, and these points effectively mark the boundary of
the two-phase region at the specified conditions.
Note
[EQ 8.179]
Technical Description
Basic laboratory experiments
345
Note
With the above caveats, the experiment may still be of use in the prediction of the existence and
possible location of either gas-oil contacts or so-called critical transitions. This latter transition
consists of the grading of a fluid from an oil to a gas, or vice-versa, without passing through a
gas-oil contact. This occurs when an over-pressured reservoir has a fluid composition at some
depth whose critical temperature is equal to the reservoir temperature at that depth. There is
evidence that such behavior exists in some North Sea fields.
FCMP experiment
Refer to Jensen and Michelsen [Ref. 38] and Pedersen et al. [Ref. 30] for detail.
MCMP experiment
Refer to Jensen and Michelsen [Ref. 38] and Pedersen et al. [Ref. 30] for detail.
Tsat experiment
Refer to Michelsen [Ref. 15] for further details.
346
Technical Description
Basic laboratory experiments
Regression
Introduction
This section of the manual contains information on:
Practical considerations
There are no set rules for how to do regression of an equation of state model to match to
laboratory measurements.
The paper by Coats and Smart, [Ref. 27], contains an appendix on the choice, selection and
range limits of regression variables.
However, the Coats and Smart model is limited in its choice of regression variables to the a s,
b s and the binary interaction coefficients.
Another limitation of their model is the use of the standard two-parameter equation of state. It
is well known that the two-parameter Equation of State is in error in prediction of liquid
properties by as much as 10%. Therefore, to get matches to saturation pressures and densities it
becomes necessary to change the properties of well-defined components, say a ( C 1 ) and
b ( C1 ) .
Such a problem is avoided in PVTi by use of the PR3 or SRK3 Equation of State, which allows
the volume shift parameter to be a possible regression variable.
Additionally, rather than varying just the a s and b s, PVTi allows you to change the critical
pressures and temperatures. This has the advantage in that monotonicity tests can readily be
applied to the set of T c s, p c s,..., etc., for the hydrocarbon components to ensure that critical
temperatures increase with increasing mole weight, critical pressures decrease (except C 1 , C 2 ,
C 3 ) etc. For further information on performing a regression in PVTi see "Regression in PVTi"
on page 126 and "REGRESS section keywords" on page 160.
The present section also contains information on:
Technical Description
Regression
347
Simple typing mistakes in reporting (for example a composition does not add up to 100).
It is most likely to be a combination of all these effects. However, an equation of state model
cannot be used in isolation from measured data as no two fluids are ever likely to be the same.
PVTi provides you with the ability to check the consistency of CVD reports in the COMB section.
For further information see "COMB - Compositional Material Balance" on page 112 and
"COMB section keywords" on page 159. This test should always be done if the data is available;
the results may be surprising.
Simple tests like checking compositions sum to 100% often reveal errors.
Another useful check is to plot pressure-dependent data, for example liquid dropout from a
CVD, relative volumes from a CCE, etc., to see if they are smoothly varying. One way this can
be done is to enter this and other data as OBS to compare with the Equation of State predicted
values from the experiments in the SIMULATE section. For further information see "Simulation
using PVTi" on page 117 and "SIMULATE section keywords" on page 160.
Generally, the properties of the multi-stage experiments vary smoothly (apart from
discontinuities in vapor/liquid properties across a saturation pressure boundary), so that vapor
Z -factors, etc., that decrease, increase and decrease again as pressure drops in a CVD, probably
indicates data error.
Check the definitions of measured data. It has been our experience that what one laboratory may
call liquid saturation in a CCE experiment, for example liquid volume divided by volume of the
fluid at the saturation pressure, may be different to that from another laboratory, say liquid
volume divided by the current cell volume.
Check that a consistent set of units is being used. The saturation density of a crude oil is often
quoted as a specific volume in units of ft 3 /lb , for example.
Plus fraction
Having determined that the data is reliable, or having rejected either poor data or adjusted it to
be consistent, one will usually find that the Equation of State predictions differ from the
measured data.
Most of this error can probably be associated with the incomplete fluid description, namely the
failure to fully characterize the plus fraction, for example C 7+ , although some error has to be
associated with the inadequacies of a cubic Equation of State.
Clearly, the plus fraction, consisting as it does of many hundreds or possibly thousands of
components, cannot be represented by just one component without some modification. Even
then, just to represent a C 7+ of a condensate or volatile oil, which may be 5-20 mole percent of
the fluid, by a single component with regressed properties may be insufficient for describing a
multi-pressure process.
On some CVD analyses the mole weight and specific gravity of the produced gas plus fraction
are measured and reported.
In such a case you may note that the plus fraction gets lighter as one would expect. Then it is
clearly not adequate to represent the plus fraction by a single component and one should
consider splitting it into two or three pseudo-components, say using the techniques available in
PVTi.
The properties of the plus fraction, or its pseudo-components if splitting has been performed are
the obvious candidates for regression. However, one should avoid regressing the property of a
component with a small mole fraction, say 1%.
348
Technical Description
Regression
This can be avoided by using the group facility in regression in which an Equation of State
property of two or more components can be treated as a single variable. This grouping of
components for regression should be borne in mind if the aim of the PVTi analysis is to produce
a pseudoised set of components for a compositional simulation.
Finally, one should always use the minimum set of variables possible.
It is not possible to say what this set is for any given fluid/measurement set, but the symptoms
of redundant variables are easy to spot; for example, one or more of the variables is hitting one
of its limits, or there is bouncing of the reported Rms error within a small range.
If the regression facility from an interactive session is being used, you have the option (as
default) of rejecting the latest regression and restoring the pre-regression Equation of State.
This makes it possible to vary the set of variables and test the success, or otherwise, of a given
set of variables in a limited number of iteration steps, for example, 10. The sensitivity of the
observations to which one is attempting to match as a function of the regression variable set is
output both to the screen and to the PVP printable. This gives a direct measure to the relative
importance, or otherwise, of a given variable.
Always use one of the three-parameter Equation of State. We suggest the Peng-Robinson
Equation of State (PR3). The extra degree of freedom allows the possibility of matching
saturation pressure using critical properties etc., and then independently matching to
saturation density (liquid) or Z -factor (gas) using the volume shifts.
Consider splitting the plus fraction for volatile fluids, that is gas condensates and volatile
oils. Genuinely, crude oils are often well described by a single plus fraction, such as the C 7+
reported. Dry gases do not have a significant quantity of plus fraction to affect results. Of
all the splitting algorithms currently available, the best appears the modified Whitson
method, otherwise referred to as Semi-Continuous-Thermodynamics (SCT). The use of
this model allows the use of the special regression parameters: sample by sample plus
fraction mole weight, probability density function skewness parameter and overall PNAdistribution.
There is strong evidence to suggest that the adjustment of one or two binary interaction
coefficients to create an un-symmetric pattern is very dangerous, see [Ref. 30]. The
alternative is to select the Cheuh-Prausnitz BICS (see "Binary interaction coefficients" on
page 336) using the appropriate options switch, and then regress the pre-multiplying A coefficient to adjust the binaries.
As an alternative to 3., one might consider other properties. If the SCT-splitting has been
activated, one might consider the mole weight and skewness parameter or the overall
characterization of the plus fraction. These techniques have the advantage of preserving
monotonicity of all the key Equation of State variables, critical temperatures and pressures,
and acentric factors. If choosing the critical properties or acentric factors, one should start
with just those of the plus fraction, or the pseudo-components split from it.
If this is not sufficient, remember that any SCN-group in your sample analysis (for example
C 6 , C 7 ,...) are subject to uncertainty because of their PNA-content. One should not have to
consider changing properties associated with C 1 , C 2 ,..., and so on. However, if you have a
significant mole percentage of inorganics in your fluid or they are being injected into your
fluid, it may be appropriate to adjust the set of inorganic-hydrocarbon binaries, probably as
a single group change.
Technical Description
Regression
349
Critical volumes or Z -factors (equivalent variables) are only needed for the Lohrenz-BrayClark (LBC) viscosity correlation.
Note
The LBC correlation can be as much as 150% in error and is regularly 50% in error.
For characterized components try using the molecular weight of these components. This is
available as a special variable and must not be used in conjunction with Tcrits etc., as
changing the molecular weight of each characterized component changes most of the
properties by way of the characterization technique anyway. The use of this variable is a
very powerful alternative one to the approach of Tcrits, Pcrits and acentric factors etc. as
described above
All observations entered into PVTi can be assigned a weighting factor that multiplies the
measured minus calculated residuals, see [EQ 8.181].
Clearly, some observations are more important than others and should be given a higher weight
to account for this.
As a general rule, the saturation pressure should be given the highest weight followed by
saturation density and then other quantities.
Users who have performed several material balance calculations on CVD experiments will
probably recognize that mole compositions should generally be given low weights, if they are
to be used at all.
The only way to perform regression is by trial and error.
Define your experiments and associated (consistent and reliable) observations and save them to
a PVI file prior to starting regression.
Include different sets of variables, experiments and observations. Use engineering judgement to
decide when the best match has been achieved to the maximum amount of data while
remembering to maintain monotonicity and physical consistency in ones Equation of State
model.
Theoretical model
Generally the results of an equation of state model must be tuned by regression of one or more
variables, x = ( x1, , x N )T to a set of laboratory experiments, y = ( y1, , y M )T
[EQ 8.180]
where M N and:
yi = yi ( x )
or in residual form:
ri ( x ) = wi [ ( y i yi ( x ) ) yi ]
350
Technical Description
Regression
[EQ 8.181]
where w i is the weighting factor applied to the i th item of observed (or measured) data, yi .
This section of the manual contains information on:
Regression algorithm
The regression algorithm in PVTi seeks to minimize the least squares residual ( l 2 norm) given
by the objective function:
M
1
f ( x ) = --2
ri ( x )
T
1
= --- R ( x ) R ( x )
2
[EQ 8.182]
i=1
f ( x ) = 0
[EQ 8.183]
Since f ( x ) is generally non-linear in the set x , [EQ 8.183] must be solved iteratively. Applying
[EQ 8.184]
x j + 1 = x j ( 2f ( x j ) ) f ( x j )
A similar procedure to evaluate the second derivative becomes prohibitively expensive and so
an approximation is generated, see [Ref. 9].
The advantage of this pseudo second-order method is that it ensures that the algorithm proceeds
towards a genuine minimum.
A function of a single variable, say g ( x ) , has a minimum at the point xm if g' ( xm ) = 0 and the
second derivative g'' ( x m ) is positive.
For a multi-variate function like the objective function, f , the equivalent requirement is that the
matrix 2f ( x ) is positive definite.
A matrix is positive definite if it is symmetric and all its eigenvalues are positive.
The approximation used to construct the second derivative ensures the symmetry condition. The
program can correct for the lack of positive eigenvalues by adding a multiple of the identity
matrix.
Technical Description
Regression
351
Trust region
The algorithm only approaches the true solution rapidly if the current estimate xj is close to the
actual solution x . Generally, the objective function at any iteration j is only an approximation
to the true solution. Therefore, it helps to identify a region surrounding the current solution, in
which we trust our second order approximation to model the actual second order problem.
PVTi employs the trust region model by defining a step length, c , which is a measure of the
region in which our model can be thought to be representative.
Ideally, the step-size, which is determined automatically subject to certain maximum and
minimum sizes, decreases as the iterations proceed to convergence.
The program uses the value of the current step length to adjust the second order derivative
matrix, so that a zero or small value of c causes PVTi to solve the full Newton problem, refer
to [EQ 8.184].
If following the evaluation of a step, the program determines that the objective function would
not decrease, then the algorithm has a procedure for cutting back the step so that it ensures a
decrease in f .
Termination conditions
A variety of termination conditions from the regression algorithm are possible.
Note
The required condition is that the residual goes to some small value, such as 10 6 , but
this is rarely achieved for larger problems.
An alternative is that the gradient of the objective function goes to zero, indicating that the
regression is approaching a minimum and no further improvement can be expected.
As a result of one or more steps made by the algorithm, one or more of the selected regression
parameters can be pushed out of physical range.
What constitutes a physical range is debatable, but it is suggested that an increase or decrease
in excess of 50% of the original value causes termination. You can change these limits but care
should be taken.
You can request a premature termination by allowing only a small number of iterations, say five
or ten.
Hint
This is a good practice to follow for any regressions which involve several variables,
experiments and observations.
Finally, if any errors are detected in any of the experiments during the regression, then
depending on their nature, the program may terminate the regression.
352
Technical Description
Regression
data suitable for use in any of these models can be generated from the PVTi package.
Each of the models and typical output is discussed in the appropriate section.
This section of the manual contains information on:
Blackoil model
ECLIPSE has a so-called extended blackoil model. That is, in addition to the standard blackoil
parameters, Rs , B o and B g , it contains the parameter R v for modeling oil vaporization in the gas
stream.
Methods of obtaining black oil tables from compositional data are described by Whitson and
Torp, [Ref. 6] and Coats, [Ref. 3].
In both cases the basis of the method is a constant volume depletion experiment, used to supply
reservoir liquid and vapor compositions at a series of pressures. (In the case of crude oil
samples, a differential liberation process is used in the same way.)
The blackoil model, used by ECLIPSE, can be viewed as a two-component compositional
model. The components are stock tank oil and stock tank gas that are assumed to be invariant
and are assigned constant densities.
PVT model
The actual form of the PVT model for the hydrocarbons depends on whether:
There is or could be liquid and/or vapor in the reservoir during its production.
The reservoir phases produce stock tank oil and/or gas on flashing to surface conditions.
Technical Description
Output for ECLIPSE simulators
353
Reservoir fluids
Assuming the stock tank fluids are constant, the reservoir fluids, named liquid and vapor to
distinguish them from the surface fluids which are designated as oil and gas, are generally a
combination of the stock tank fluids.
The amount of surface gas dissolved in the reservoir liquid is given by the Gas-Oil-Ratio
(GOR), denoted Rs , which has units of sm3 /sm3 (metric), mscf/stb (field) or scm 3 /scm 3 (lab).
The volume of surface oil vaporized in the reservoir vapor is given by the Condensate-GasRatio (CGR), denoted Rv , which has units of sm3 /sm 3 (metric), stb/mscf (field) or scm 3 /scm 3
(lab).
The model uses formation factors to account for changes in volume when the fluids are
transferred from the reservoir to the surface. The factors for the liquid and vapor are denoted,
Bo
and Bg , and given units of rm3 /sm 3 (metric), rb/stb (field) or rm3 /sm 3 (lab), and rm3 /sm3
[EQ 8.185]
M or = M go + M oo
[EQ 8.186]
where ( M gr, M or ) are the reservoir molar masses and ( M og, M gg ) , ( M go, M oo ) are the corresponding
actual surface masses after flashing.
Since = M V , we can write equations [EQ 8.185] and [EQ 8.186] as:
gr V gr = og V og + gg V gg
[EQ 8.187]
or V or = go V go + oo V oo
[EQ 8.188]
or:
1
gr = ------ ( gg + R v og )
Bg
[EQ 8.189]
1
or = ------ ( oo + R s go )
Bo
[EQ 8.190]
where:
V go
R s = ------V oo
354
V og
R v = ------V gg
[EQ 8.191]
Technical Description
Output for ECLIPSE simulators
V or
B o = ------V oo
Note
V gr
B g = ------V gg
[EQ 8.192]
Strictly, the blackoil model requires that the stock tank components are constant and
invariant with time.
CVD process
In the Coats method, only the reservoir vapor is taken through the separator, the oil B o and R s
values being obtained by solving the mass conservation equations:
sto V 2 ( b g S g + b o R s S o ) 2 = sto V 1 ( b g S g + b o R s S o ) 1
[EQ 8.193]
stg V 2 ( b g R v S g + b o S o ) 2 = stg V 1 ( B g R v S g + b o S o )1
[EQ 8.194]
for each expansion step of the CVD process from V 1 to V2 , where sto and stg are fixed surface
densities, and b o = 1 Bo , b g = 1 B g .
The stock tank densities are obtained from the output of the separators at the saturation pressure.
Solving these equations yields values at all pressures except the saturation pressure, at which
the Whitson method can be used.
Alternatively, a small initial pressure step from the saturation pressure may be specified.
Note
The constant volume expansion method is usually applied to condensates, but can also
be used for volatile oils.
Differential liberation
The differential liberation approach is only suitable for oils.
In this case, the analogue of the Whitson method runs both reservoir oil and vapor through the
separators as before.
The analogue of the Coats method uses the conservation equations, [EQ 8.193] & [EQ 8.194]
(although in this case S g1 is zero for each step), sto and stg are obtained from the reservoir oil
at the saturation pressure.
The "Choosing the unit type for PVTi" on page 144 program option gives you a choice
of outputting and plotting all the data (saturated and undersaturated) or just the
saturated data.
Technical Description
Output for ECLIPSE simulators
355
An example of a typical set of blackoil data (for a volatile oil fluid) is shown below:
-- Blackoil tables for sample ZI at T = 176.00000 deg F
-- With Peng-Robinson (three-parameter) EoS
-- And Lohrenz-Bray-Clark viscosity correlation
-- ECLIPSE 100 DENSITY data
-- Surface densities of oil, water and gas:
-- Units of FIELD
DENSITY
50.74699
62.42797
0.05842
214.69590
14.69590
-- Temperatures
100.00010
60.00001
-- Pressures in PSIA
Temperatures in deg F
356
Technical Description
Output for ECLIPSE simulators
PVTG
--
PRES
RV
--
PSIA
STB/MSCF
1114.69590
0.00000
BG
0.00099
2.43919
1814.69590
0.00276
VISC
RB/MSCF
2.43709
1.43004
1.43350
0.0165733
0.00000
1.43543
0.0165380
0.00736
0.0139554
0.0139489
0.00099
2514.69590
CPOISE
1.02359
--Saturated
/ --Dry gas
0.0166381
--Saturated
--Undersat gas
/ --Dry gas
0.0206166
--Saturated
0.00276
1.02929
0.0202678
--Undersat gas
0.00099
1.03150
0.0201382
--Undersat gas
0.00000
1.03272
0.0200669
3214.69590
0.01695
0.82309
0.00736
0.82851
0.0246867
0.00276
0.83111
0.0242117
0.00099
0.83211
0.0240316
0.00000
0.83267
0.0239322
3914.69590
0.03492
0.71605
/ --Dry gas
0.0257392
--Saturated
--Undersat gas
--Undersat gas
--Undersat gas
/ --Dry gas
0.0321610
--Saturated
0.01695
0.71725
0.0297284
--Undersat gas
0.00736
0.71789
0.0285431
--Undersat gas
0.00276
0.71820
0.0279877
--Undersat gas
0.00099
0.71831
0.0277758
--Undersat gas
0.00000
0.71838
0.0276584
4077.56801
0.04108
0.69977
/ --Dry gas
0.0339734
--Psat
0.03492
0.69960
0.0329685
--Undersat gas
0.01695
0.69910
0.0306120
--Undersat gas
0.00736
0.69884
0.0293996
--Undersat gas
0.00276
0.69871
0.0288303
--Undersat gas
0.00099
0.69867
0.0286129
--Undersat gas
0.00000
0.69864
0.0284924
4614.69590
0.04109
0.65591
0.0368566
/ --Dry gas
--Generated
0.03492
0.65447
0.0357868
--Undersat gas
0.01695
0.65029
0.0332692
--Undersat gas
0.00736
0.64806
0.0319664
--Undersat gas
0.00276
0.64699
0.0313522
--Undersat gas
0.00099
0.64658
0.0311171
--Undersat gas
0.00000
0.64635
0.0309867
--ECLIPSE 100 PVTO data
/ --Dry gas
PVTO
Technical Description
Output for ECLIPSE simulators
357
---
RS
PRES
MSCF/STB PSIA
0.49137
BO
RB/STB
VISC
CPOISE
114.6959 0.34107
1814.69590 1.32574
0.33605
2514.69590 1.31260
0.36369
3214.69590 1.30116
0.39067
3914.69590 1.29106
0.41705
4077.56801 1.28887
0.42310
0.30770
0.26054
3214.69590 1.45641
0.28344
3914.69590 1.44147
0.30594
4077.56801 1.43827
0.31112
0.20520
3914.69590 1.62331
0.22377
4077.56801 1.61862
0.22806
--Saturated
--Saturated
--Saturated
/
0.14692
--Saturated
--Saturated
3914.69590 1.87000
0.16174
4077.56801 1.86286
0.16517
4077.56801 2.24611
0.11645
4614.69590 2.21050
0.12507
2.56913
077.56801 2.37483
4614.69590 2.33394
2.66303
0.11462
4614.69590 2.37492
5151.82379 2.33402
0.11423
/
0.10661
--Psat
/
0.10622
--Generated
Both the PVTO and PVTG tables are extended to include properties of the undersaturated oil and
gas, respectively.
In the case of the PVTG table the model computes, at all values of Rv between the saturated
value and the dry gas value ( Rv = 0.0 ), a value for Bg by adding sufficient stock tank oil to the
stock tank gas (both from the flash of the saturated gas to stock tank) to give the required R v and
then taking the ratio of this fluid's volume at reservoir and stock tank volumes.
In the case of the PVTO table, the model compresses the saturated fluid from a given Rs node at
all pressures from the saturated pressure up to the highest pressure. The ratio of these volumes
to the resulting stock tank oil volume (from flashing the saturated oil) gives the undersaturated
B o values.
358
Technical Description
Output for ECLIPSE simulators
R v ( p ) = R v ( p sat ) [ 1 + v ( p p sat ) ]
C tot = S o C o + S g C g
where ( S o, S g ) are the saturations, and ( C o, C g ) are the compressibilities, of oil and gas
respectively, the latter given by:
dR ( B g R v B o )
1 dB
C o = ------ -----------o- + --------s ---------------------------dp ( 1 R s R v )
B o dp
[EQ 8.197]
dR ( B o R s B g )
1 dB
C g = ------ -----------g- + --------v ---------------------------B g dp
dp ( 1 R s R v )
[EQ 8.198]
Alternatively if you do not want these generated points, PVTi allows you to increase the
saturated pressure of the sample to above the maximum pressure used in the depletion
experiment by mixing the sample with a lighter gas sample.
The gas sample used is the vapor split-off obtained from performing a p sat calculation on the
original sample.
The model mixes this vapor with the sample and performs a new p sat calculation on the new
sample.
It then mixes the resulting vapor split off with the new sample and repeats the process until a
p sat forms that is higher than the maximum pressure stage. If this process is successful you can
save the final sample and use it in the calculation of the black oil tables.
Note
Oil and gas properties below the saturation point generated as described above are also
subjected to the ECLIPSE total compressibility test.
Note
Technical Description
Output for ECLIPSE simulators
359
These definitions are detailed in the manual (refer to "Basic laboratory experiments"
on page 338 and "Gas condensate systems" on page 340, and to equations [EQ 8.171]
and [EQ 8.173]). The quantities are known here as B Do and RDs .
From these differential quantities, it is possible to estimate composite values of Bo and R s using
a number of formulae.
Two of the more popular methods are due to Moses, , and Fragor, [Ref. 40] (both now termed
CM and CF respectively).
Both methods start by estimating a value for Bo and R s at the saturated pressure ( p sat ) of the
CM
initial oil. This oil is passed through a separator chain and the values of B CF
o ( p sat ) and B o ( p sat )
are given by the oil formation volume factor from the separator. Likewise the values of R CF
s ( p sat )
and RCM
s ( p sat ) are given the value of the gas-oil ratio from the separator.
Once these two values are computed, the rest of the values from the lowest pressure up to psat
are found from the following formulae.
Firstly the Fragor definitions:
CF
( B o ( p sat ) 1 ) ( B o ( p ) 1 )
CF
B o ( p ) = 1 + ----------------------------------------------------------------D
( B o ( p sat ) 1 )
[EQ 8.199]
and
CF
R s ( p sat )R s ( p )
CF
R s ( p ) = -------------------------------------D
R s ( p sat )
[EQ 8.200]
B o ( p sat )B o ( p )
CM
B o ( p ) = --------------------------------------D
B o ( p sat )
[EQ 8.201]
and
B CM
CM
CM
D
D
o ( p sat )
-
R s ( p ) = R s ( p sat ) ( R s ( p sat ) R s ( p ) ) ---------------------- BD
o ( p sat )
[EQ 8.202]
PVTi can provide all four types of black oil output, that is, the usual composite, the differential,
and the two composite from differential tables.
Note
360
The output form for the differential and composite from differential tables is by way
of the PVTO/PVDO and PVDG keywords only.
Technical Description
Output for ECLIPSE simulators
The extended blackoil treatment, that is variable R v as available in ECLIPSE, cannot model
gas injection into condensates at pressures less than p sat , without careful consideration (see
ECLIPSE keyword VAPPARS). Lean gas injected into a saturated reservoir fluid causes the
stripping of the light and intermediate components from the reservoir fluid, resulting in an
enriched gas phase and a depleted liquid phase.
To model this process accurately requires a detailed fluid description and the use of a fully
compositional simulator using a many-component model of the fluid. However, such is
generally impractical, especially using a fully implicit formulation since the number of
equations, which need to be solved increases with the product of the number of components
and the number of gridblocks.
ECLIPSE GI option
One possible solution to this problem is to extend the three-parameter blackoil model as used in
ECLIPSE BlackOil, that is p , S w and So , by adding a fourth parameter/equation.
In the ECLIPSE pseudo-compositional model, this fourth parameter, denoted GI, is the
cumulative gas volume, which has passed over the volume of reservoir liquid in a gridblock. As
such, GI is equivalent to a gas-oil ratio of volume of injection gas at standard conditions to
volume of oil at reservoir conditions:
gas
V stc
GI = --------oil
V res
[EQ 8.203]
n ZRT stc
gas
V stc = ------------------------p stc
[EQ 8.204]
where n add is the number of moles of gas added. By convention, at standard pressure and
temperature, p stc = 14.7 psia, T stc = 60.0 F , and the gas-compressibility factor, Z = 1 .
Having defined a Constant Volume Depletion (CVD) experiment and a separator network with
the last stage corresponding to stock tank conditions, the model then performs a calculation of
the conventional extended blackoil tables. This defines the GI=0.0 data.
Technical Description
Output for ECLIPSE simulators
361
It then adds lean gas to the reservoir fluid in a series of stages and generates the blackoil table
with the mixture. The ratio of the non-zero GI blackoil properties and the GI=0.0 properties
defines a set of GI-multipliers. This gives a two-dimensional set of tables in ( p , GI) to describe
the fluid behavior.
Detailed evaluations of the models performance have been undertaken and with favourable
conditions and tuning against a full compositional treatment, this model can give reliable
predictions.
K -value
It is envisaged that generally you will want to run ECLIPSE Compositional in compositional
(Equation of State) mode.
However, in blackoil mode, ECLIPSE 300 reads the same PVTO and PVTG tables as used in
ECLIPSE BlackOil.
In K -value mode, you must specify a set of K -values for each component at a set of pressures
spanning the operating pressure region. You can generate these, as in PVTi, by performing a
CVD experiment on the reservoir fluid.
Compositional mode
The Equation of State mode is essentially the same as that employed by PVTi for its flash,
saturation pressure, etc., calculations.
You must specify the number of components, the Equation of State required (the same set as
available in PVTi), and the critical properties, acentric factors, binary interaction coefficients,
compositions, etc.
Clearly, the more components used, the more accurate the simulation (assuming the component
set has been optimised to measured data); however, such simulations require more CPU time.
Hint
If running ECLIPSE Compositional in fully implicit mode, more than six or seven
components may become prohibitive for all but the largest of supercomputers or
workstations, in which case you should consider pseudoisation of this fluid system to
fewer components.
Water properties
ECLIPSE and VFPi consider water to be non-volatile (only exists as liquid water) and
immiscible with the hydrocarbon phases (water cannot dissolve in the hydrocarbons or viceversa). This simplifies the PVT treatment of water.
362
Technical Description
Output for ECLIPSE simulators
If water is present, the variation of water volume in the reservoir with pressure, V w ( p ) , is defined
with respect to the volume of water at surface conditions, Vstw , by the formation volume factor,
B w , where:
Vw ( p )
B w ( p ) = -------------V stw
[EQ 8.205]
which has units of rm3 /sm 3 (metric), rb/stb (field) or rcm3 /scm3 (lab).
Note
Within the models, B w is defined in terms of the Bw at some reference pressure, p ref :
B w ( p ref )
B w ( p ) = ----------------------------2
(1 + X + X )
[EQ 8.206]
where
[EQ 8.207]
X = C w ( p p ref )
[EQ 8.208]
[EQ 8.209]
where
[EQ 8.210]
Y = C w ( p p ref )
[EQ 8.211]
that also has units of barsa1 (metric), psia 1 (field) or atmos1 (lab).
An additional complication can arise if the effect of salt (brine) concentration is to be modeled
(ECLIPSE BlackOil and GI option only). See the ECLIPSE keyword PVTWSALT for further
details in this case.
Note
Correlations for generating default values for all the above correlations can be found
in [Ref. 33].
Technical Description
Output for ECLIPSE simulators
363
Since the API Tracking functionality in ECLIPSE models the mixing of live oil
properties the usual procedure in PVTi is to use the API Tracking export facility to
write out a series of tables containing the PVTO (live oil) and PVDG (dead gas).
You can then specify whether they want a gas table for each sample. Normally the API Tracking
option in ECLIPSE only uses a different oil table for each sample and just a single gas table is
used, as explained in the next section, and so this is the default. If this default option is used then
PVTi exports a single gas table for the sample with the median gas density at surface conditions.
The separator and units to use for the export can be specified in the normal way. You can also
specify a few other straightforward options such as whether to write to full double precision and
whether to plot the tables.
When the export is performed PVTi orders the tables so that the oil surface densities increase
monotonically with table number, which is a requirement of ECLIPSE. Each table also has
comments associated with it specifying which sample the table is linked to and what the oil
surface density is for this particular table.
364
Technical Description
Output for ECLIPSE simulators
ECLIPSE requires that the Rs ranges of any live oil tables are the same. To ensure this is the
case PVTi analyzes all the samples you selected and calculates the Rs at the maximum pressure
in the DL experiment. PVTi then finds the sample with the maximum Rs and then uses linear
extrapolation to extend the black oil tables of the other samples so that the Rs ranges for all the
samples are the same.
See the next few sections for technical details of ECLIPSEs API Tracking option.
Technical Description
Output for ECLIPSE simulators
365
For water and gas PVT properties, the PVTNUM regions correspond to the actual table numbers,
as in runs that do not use API tracking. So a cell in PVTNUM region 2 still uses table number 2
for its water and gas properties.
366
Technical Description
Output for ECLIPSE simulators
"Outline of keywords for ECLIPSE Thermal" on page 367 contains a brief description of
the keywords exported.
"Workflow" on page 368 section gives step-by-step instructions of how to perform a typical
export for use in ECLIPSE Thermal.
"Some handy hints for fitting the Crookston coefficients" on page 369 gives some hints and
tips on how to export Crookston coefficients that provide accurate approximations to
PVTis EoS K-values.
For the 2003A version of PVTi a new ECLIPSE Thermal support module was available where
you were able to interactively develop a correlation which accurately predicted K-values for
each component in a given fluid. For the 2004A version this module has been extended to a full
export facility where you can write out files that are suitable for use as PVT input for ECLIPSE
Thermal. The motivation behind this is so that, just as you can export files to use as PVT input
for ECLIPSE BlackOil and ECLIPSE Compositional, they will now be able to do the same for
ECLIPSE Thermal.
When you use this new export facility, they now have a choice of keywords to export regarding
K-values - namely the KVCR keyword (which was available in 2003A PVTi) or the KVWI
keyword which is tells ECLIPSE Thermal to use a simplified version of Crookstons equation
called Wilsons formula. In addition PVTi also exports a series of other keywords enabling
ECLIPSE Thermal to calculate properties of the feed fluid such as oil density, gas density and
oil/gas phase enthalpies.
For a technical description of how these keywords exported by PVTi are used in ECLIPSE
Thermal see "ECLIPSE Thermal Export Module" on page 401. For a summary and brief outline
of the nature of these keywords see the next section.
Technical Description
Output for ECLIPSE simulators
367
TREFT - the ECLIPSE Thermal reference temperature at which the reference density,
DREFT, is calculated.
Note
In general the quantities TREFT, PREFT, DREFT are not the same as the related
quantities of reference temperature, TREF and references density, DREF used in
PVTi. Please see
Workflow
1
To access the Thermal Support module select Edit | Samples | ECLIPSE Thermal
Support | Export for ECLIPSE Thermal.... Alternatively right- click on a fluid sample
of interest and select Export ECLIPSE Thermal Model....
In the panel type in the maximum and minimum values of the pressure in your reservoir
and also the maximum and minimum temperature.
Select the sample you wish to export the model for by using the drop-down menu.
You need to decide if you want to estimate K-values in ECLIPSE Thermal using
Crookstons equation or using Wilsons formula. Wilsons formula gives much less
accurate results than Crookstons formula but if you have time constraints then much less
work is involved in exporting this information from PVTi. If you want to use Wilsons
formula then your work is finished and you do not need to go though steps 5-12. Simply
select which units you want to export and click OK.
Hint
368
If you have time and you know the rough limits on temperature and pressure within
your reservoir then Crookstons equation will, in general, give you much more
accurate estimates of K-values than Wilsons formula.
Technical Description
Output for ECLIPSE simulators
If you want to export coefficients for Crookstons equation then tick the box entitled Export
Crookston Coefficients?
Select the coefficients to optimize. As a rule always start with B and D or A,B and D. Now
click Apply and PVTi attempts to use a minimization algorithm to calculate the best values
of your chosen coefficients that gives the most accurate prediction of K-values for each
component.
Once PVTi has finished a results window opens with two folders. The Coefficients folder
enables you to see the coefficient values derived by PVTi for each component. The
Statistics folder enables you to observe the mean rms of the fit (in %) and the standard
deviation (in %) of the fits for each component over the specified temperature and pressure
range.
10 To view your fit click View Fit on the Fit Crookston Coefficients panel. Another panel
opens. You are able to view the results by plotting K-values as a function of temperature (at
constant pressure) or pressure (at constant temperature). Type in the appropriate
information and click Apply.
11 PVTi now show you the observations it was fitting to for each component, that is the Kvalues found using the Equation of State based flash (the points) and the curves, which are
the predictions of the K-values found using Crookstons formula.
12 Once you are happy with your results close the Fit Crookston Coefficients panel and click
OK on the Export for ECLIPSE Thermal panel. A File | Save panel opens. Choose the
name of the file you want to save it as and click Enter. A text file is created and shown in
the output display containing the exported keywords. This file can be used as the PVT input
in an ECLIPSE Thermal simulation.
Note
The default file extension when exporting for ECLIPSE Thermal is .PVOT. The save
panel assumes you want to call your exported file filename.PVOT where
filename.PVI is the name of your PVTi project file.
See the next section for some hints on performing the optimization of the Crookston
coefficients.
[EQ 8.212]
Technical Description
Output for ECLIPSE simulators
369
You are able to specify which coefficients to use in equation [EQ 8.109] (as already explained
in the previous section) and PVTi calculates the values of these coefficients which give the best
fit to the PVTi flash for each component over the pressure and temperature range. The following
things may help you in your workflow:
1
Try doing a phase curve first of your fluid to get an idea of the pressure and temperature
range where your sample is two-phase. PVTi does not use any regions of pressuretemperature space where the fluid is single phase.
When choosing the values of the max/min temperature and pressure consider the following:
a
Make sure you alter these values to suit your particular reservoir. Try to make the
region that is defined by your values as small as possible. For example if you think that
the maximum temperature in your reservoir is going to be 300F then do not leave the
default value in the panel (400F).
If the region you define is too big then Crookstons formula may have trouble getting
good fits to the EoS based K-values. This is because K-values are really a function of
the fluid composition as well as the pressure and temperature. See "K-Values" on
page 401 for an explanation of why this is so.
The number of flashes variable is set by default to 20. PVTi randomly throws this number
of points into your defined region and flashes are performed at each (P,T) coordinate in
order to obtain K-values. These are the observations. You are probably fine using 20 as this
value. If your region is particularly big (which is not recommended) then you may want to
increase this. By the same token, decreasing this value will speed up the calculations
significantly, but the fits may be less accurate.
The A and D coefficients are turned on by default. You can turn them off if you want to but
experience shows that you will almost always need them to get the best fits to the
observations. In theory, turning all of the coefficients on should give the best fits. In
practice, although you will do this most of the time, you will find:
a
this slows the application down as it increases the parameter space to search. If you
want to get a feel for how the module works start with A, B and D turned on.
the algorithm finds the nearest local minimum of the objective function. This may not
be the global minimum. PVTi uses an intelligent guess and the idea is that it starts in
the parameter space reasonably close to the global minimum so that this is the nearest
local minimum. When all 5 coefficients are switched on this initial guess technique is
not always guaranteed to give as good a guess as when less coefficients are selected.
When you view the fits, check to see how good they are when you use a constant value of
temperature that is halfway between the maximum and the minimum one. In theory the
pressure part of Crookstons equation should show the best fit here. If the functional form
of the line plots looks wrong for even a single component then you probably need another
pressure coefficient in order to match all the components for this particular fluid. Check in
the same way for the temperature part of Crookstons equation and turn E on as well if the
D coefficient is having trouble fitting the observations
In terms of the rms values you should expect in the fits, this depends on how large a region
you define and how many components are in your fluid. If the region is, say 1000 psia high
and 200K wide, then you should expect fits on the observations of 2-3% on average.
For more technical information on the ECLIPSE Thermal export facility see "ECLIPSE
Thermal Export Module" on page 401.
370
Technical Description
Output for ECLIPSE simulators
Analysis techniques
Introduction
Technical Description
Analysis techniques
371
Under-saturated reservoirs
Refers to those reservoirs that are under-saturated not only at the time of their discovery but also
throughout their development.
Note
This class does not include reservoirs whose pressures fall below the bubble point at
some time during their development, or reservoirs that are subject to gas injection.
Under-saturated reservoirs can be represented by two-phase (oil and water) simulation models,
usually using the black oil formulation. For further information see "Under-saturated
reservoirs" on page 374.
All reservoirs with initial gas-caps are regarded as saturated (but may not be
adequately represented by the black oil formulation).
Volatile oil usually refers to a reservoir fluid whose critical temperature is only slightly
above the reservoir temperature under initial conditions.
372
Technical Description
Recommended PVT analysis for oil reservoirs
Oil reservoirs
Almost all under-saturated reservoirs, and most saturated oil reservoirs where the reservoir fluid
has a critical temperature far above the reservoir temperature, do not normally require the
complexity of compositional simulation, and a black oil formulation is normally of sufficient
accuracy.
Note
Such a formulation does not allow the stock tank oil density or gas density to vary with
time.
Technical Description
Recommended PVT analysis for oil reservoirs
373
Under-saturated reservoirs
For under-saturated reservoirs, it is not often that an equation of state representation is of
particular value, although you may find the PVTi program useful for separator calculations.
Although it is possible to derive black oil tables from equation of state models, for this
application it is better to derive them from laboratory data for the following reasons:
Laboratory analyses generally have sufficient information to derive the PVT tables directly.
It is often difficult to characterize reservoir oils accurately. This leads to difficulty in
establishing an equation of state model that satisfactorily matches the measured data.
To establish a black oil PVT model of a single sample from an undersaturated reservoir the
following procedure is recommended:
1
From the laboratory report take the saturation pressure (bubble point) of the sample, the
reservoir density at that pressure, and the compressibility (as a function of pressure) above
the saturation pressure.
If the field is under production there is normally data available on the producing GOR for
the field separator conditions, the gas gravity ( g , air = 1), and the stock tank oil gravity
(API).
Ensure that the GOR and gas gravity include all the separator and stock tank gases. If they
do not then you can often make reasonable estimates. You can then combine this data with
the reported oil density to give the formation volume factor ( Bo ) at the saturation pressure
p b as follows (in field units):
g GOR 0.00122
1
141.5 - + --------------------------------------------B o ( p b ) = -------- -------------------------------- res ( 131.5 + API )
5.6146
[EQ 8.213]
where res is the reservoir density in gm/cc, and the GOR in scf/rb.
4
You can find the oil formation volume factor at pressures higher than the saturation pressure
using the compressibility factor in the PVT report.
If the field has only been tested and there is no data on producing GOR and gas gravity then
often a separator test for appropriate separator conditions are reported. This supplies a
formation volume factor for bubble point oil at these conditions of separation. You can use
the reported compressibilities to derive formation volume factors at higher pressures.
If a separation test is reported and the field is under production, then you should rationalize
the formation volume factors derived from point 2 with the separator test.
If no separation test was performed by the laboratory and there is no production data, then
you can either use a suitable set of correlations, or, if the sample is a re-combination, it may
be possible to use the re-combination data to derive data at separation conditions using
PVTi, providing it is possible to characterize the fluid.
Note
374
It is important to avoid using what is often referred to as the formation volume factor
(it is actually a relative volume) during a differential liberation experiment. The oil
remaining at the end of this experiment has a completely different composition from
stock tank oil and this formation volume factor is usually higher (by as much as 10%)
than the correct value.
For the simulation of undersaturated reservoirs this differential liberation experiment
is usually superfluous, although laboratories often perform it anyway.
Technical Description
Recommended PVT analysis for oil reservoirs
If there are a number of samples you should follow the above procedure for each one.
7
Then determine if there evidence of an API gradient by plotting stock tank oil density
against depth.
If there is no such evidence take the most appropriate sample (or average of samples). This
becomes the PVT representation of the reservoir oil.
If the reservoir has an API gradient the following additional stages are recommended:
9
Draw a representative curve through the API versus depth plot. Use this to represent the
model API versus depth relationship of the reservoir oil.
10 There are a number of ways of allocating PVT properties as functions of API gravity. By
suitable plots, such as saturation pressure against depth, formation volume factor for a
common pressure against depth, and formation volume factor against pressure, you can
find a method appropriate to that particular reservoir. You may find it necessary to use
correlations to extrapolate to depths above and below the range of sample data.
Again it must be stressed that you should not use differential liberation data alone.
What is often referred to as the formation volume factor during the liberation makes
no reference to separator conditions.
To be completely accurate the laboratory should perform a separation test on the fluid resulting
from each pressure stage of the differential liberation experiment.
In practice this is rarely done, and the volumetric data is determined from the single separation
test (at the bubble point pressure), and the relative volumes and gas volumes of the differential
liberation experiment.
The correct oil formation volume factor is this relative volume, divided by the relative volume
of the bubble point fluid (during the same differential liberation), multiplied by the correct oil
formation volume factor of the bubble point fluid for the separator conditions operating. This
derivation, of course, uses the black oil approximation that the stock tank oil density is
unchanging.
Solution gas-oil ratio is derived in a similar way, the value at the bubble point pressure being
exactly that derived from the separator test ( R s ( p b ) ).
Simple material balance of gas and oil shows that the correct gas-oil ratio ( Rs ) at a pressure
below the bubble point is given by:
R s = R s ( p b ) ( R s' ( p b ) R s' )B o' ( p b ) B o ( p b )
[EQ 8.214]
where Rs' and Bo' refer respectively to the reported solution gas-oil ratio and formation volume
factor from the differential liberation experiment.
Technical Description
Recommended PVT analysis for oil reservoirs
375
As well as API plots against depth for different samples, plots of producing gas-oil ratio and
formation volume factor against depth (for a consistent pressure) may indicate a solution gasoil ratio for a such a reservoir.
376
Technical Description
Recommended PVT analysis for oil reservoirs
The results of such modeling are to over-estimate the condensate recovery from the
field by a few percent for full and partial pressure maintenance. Low pressure
recycling will probably be very poorly modeled.
Technical Description
Recommended PVT analysis for gas condensate reservoirs
377
Data analysis
A common failing when analyzing gas condensate reservoirs is to attempt to establish an
equation of state representation without thorough analysis of the data on which it is to be based.
A thorough comparison of samples, analysis of inter- and intra- sample consistency, and
clarification of the aims of establishing an equation of state model, allows you to determine
which data is worth trying to match, what components to use, and how best to establish a
matched model.
You should closely scrutinize all the available samples. Some of the questions that should be
answered are as follows:
1
Are the samples properly constituted (examine recombination data and compare with
correlations)?
Are other experimental data such as Z -factors, implied K -values and liquid densities
reasonable (correlations and tests of consistency)?
During this analysis it may seem reasonable to establish alternative (modified) data by adjusting
sample data to achieve material balance consistency and a reasonable fluid description. This can
be a useful exercise but a good appreciation of the main sources of inaccuracy is required for it
to be successful.
If the sample is a recombination, the report usually contains recombination data that can be used
for calibrating correlations, to obtain an analysis of separation using the COMB section of PVTi.
For further information see "COMB - Compositional Material Balance" on page 112 and
"COMB section keywords" on page 159.
It is possible to obtain gas and condensate recovery estimates for different abandonment
pressures by combining this with constant composition data above the dew point, and CVD data
below the dew point.
After you have analyzed each sample individually you should examine all the samples together
by, for example, plotting dew point pressures and condensate-gas ratios against sampling depth,
comparing compositions, fingerprint plots etc.
Before rejecting any particular sample that appears to be anomalous, you should investigate the
source of anomalies. Such an investigation may be useful in making recommendations
concerning sampling techniques or laboratory analysis.
378
Technical Description
Recommended PVT analysis for gas condensate reservoirs
Establish a model based upon as many components as the data defines, using correlations
where necessary. Split the last component (the plus fraction) into, say, three further
fractions, using one of the splitting options. The modified Whitson (Semi-ContinuousThermodynamics (SCT)) is recommended. For further information see "Multi-feed Split
(also called semi-continuous thermodynamic (SCT) split)" on page 106.
Previously, it was recommended that the binary interaction coefficient between Methane
and the plus fraction be varied to match the dew point pressure. This practice is no-longer
recommended. Adjusting binaries to match saturation pressure at just one temperature
often massively distorts the phase envelope at other (generally lower) temperatures, see
[Ref. 30].
Instead, it is now recommended to use one of the following approaches:
a
Having performed an SCT-split, regress on the plus fraction mole weight, PVTis
internal correlations then convert this modified mole weight into critical properties,
etc., which are monotonic and consistent.
If the above are unavailable, critical temperature of plus fraction usually requires
changing less than any other individual EoS parameter.
Compare this first model with the data to be matched. This usually comprises the
volumetric data associated with constant volume and constant composition experiments,
separator data and swelling test data. As well as the volumetric data, it is important to
compare compositional data, although the possible inaccuracies in reported compositions
should be considered here.
Attempt to establish a model that is a good match with only a minimal modification of the
data. Such modifications may be made manually or semi-automatically but you should
obtain a good understanding of the effects of each modification.
The emphasis is on the modification (preferably consistently) of individual component
descriptions, especially those of the heavy components which are poorly defined. The
splitting of the plus fraction may be a suitable modification to make.
Other properties to consider are the critical temperature and pressure of the plus fraction
along with its acentric factor. Additionally, because of the generally uncertain ParaffinicNapthanic-Aromatic (PNA) of the Single Carbon Number (SCN) groups, that is hexanes,
heptanes, etc., these are a better option for a more limited change.
If such a minimal set of modifications does not give a satisfactory match then a full regression
procedure may be necessary as described for pseudoization below. Ideally this full regression
will not be necessary before pseudoization.
Technical Description
Recommended PVT analysis for gas condensate reservoirs
379
Generate a black oil table from this many-component model from a simulated CVD
experiment. For further information on defining experiments in PVTi see "Defining
Experiments" on page 117.
Compare the predictions of the pseudo-component model with the laboratory data.
Use the automatic regression procedure to modify the representation. The emphasis now is
on obtaining a good match to the data and the results of the many-component model. Fairly
coarse matching parameters may be required.
Modify parameters for which a small change has a large effect. (The matrix of sensitivities
produced by the regression algorithm may be useful here.) You should try several sets of
regression parameters and you should compare the predictions over the whole area of
interest (including mixing of dry and wet gases) with the predictions of the manycomponent model and with the data (where available).
When pseudoizing, the ideal grouping results in minimal predictive change from the
original system. This is not always possible and some small changes in the group properties
may be necessary.
If there are problems matching reservoir data and separator data simultaneously then it is
possible to divorce the two in ECLIPSE for compositional simulation, using different
values and binary interaction coefficients for the separators, or using K -values for the
separators.
It is also possible to account for temperature variation using the temperature-dependent
volume shift. By matching separator volumetric properties first, that is at or near surface
temperature where the volume shifts are actually defined, you can then attempt to match to
reservoir volumetric properties, at the elevated reservoir temperature, by using the thermal
expansion coefficient that is available as a regression variable.
One advantage of the above procedure is that it addresses directly one of the main problem areas
in this type of work: the characterization of the heavy fractions.
These components have an effect on fluid behavior that far outweighs their sometimes small
mole fractions. You always rationalize any splitting performed with any true boiling point
(TBP) distillation data available, fingerprint plots, correlations etc.
A second advantage of the recommended procedure is that it allows (through the manycomponent model) a good understanding of the character of the fluid.
A third advantage is that if it is possible to obtain a good match to the laboratory data with
minimal modification of the pure many-component equation of state model then it is more likely
that accurate predictions are obtained away from the measured data.
Note
380
A cubic equation of state can only supply approximations to the behavior of fluids.
This must be borne in mind when matching laboratory data, but especially when
extrapolating outside the area of data control. By the same token, laboratory analyses
of samples only normally supply an approximation to the sample behavior and the
sample itself is only an approximation to the reservoir fluid.
Technical Description
Recommended PVT analysis for gas condensate reservoirs
Technical Description
Consistency tests and correlations
381
K-value checks
The Hoffmann-Crump-Hocott (HCH) technique consists of plotting the logarithm of the
product of the K -value and the pressure against a characterization factor for each component.
HCH found that at any given pressure this data plotted close to a straight line, at least for the
pure components. It is possible to check K -values derived from the (calculated) liquid and
(reported) gas compositions during the various stages of the CVD experiment. For further
information on defining experiments in PVTi see "Report" on page 113.
This technique is also useful for checking the recombination of samples. It forms the basis of
Standings method for performing separator calculations, discussed later.
Another good check of the K -values from a CVD experiment is to plot them against the
logarithm of pressure for each component. This allows an estimation of the apparent
convergence pressure, which then allows cross-checking against NGAA tables.
Viscosity calculations
Laboratories generally do not have the equipment for measuring gas viscosities and usually
calculate viscosities based on the Carr, Kobaysahi and Burrows correlation. Other correlations
exist, such as the "Lohrenz, Bray and Clark" on page 330 method and the "Pedersen et al." on
page 331 corresponding states technique. These different correlations often yield markedly
different predicted viscosities.
Ideally, a consistent correlation should be used throughout the reservoir engineering analysis,
from the well test analysis used to derive permeabilities to the reservoir simulation. ECLIPSE
accepts a set of critical volumes (entered with VCRITVIS or ZCRITVIS), which are only used
for viscosity calculations, in order that significant changes in Vc values used to match viscosity
correlations do not effect the remainder of the simulation.
Separator calculations
Standing evolved a method for calculating K -values for separators, based on the HCH method.
For each component, a b -factor is calculated at the separator temperature.
HCH suggested that this b -factor is based on pure component normal boiling points and critical
temperatures.
Standing suggested a slightly different set but this probably only applied to the particular oil he
was considering. b -factors obtained by the HCH method may be used in PVTi to generate
separator K -values.
An alternative is to use those derived from recombination data, though these should first be
checked against those obtained using the HCH method.
From the K -values derived in this way, PVTi can calculate the condensate and oil recoveries for
a given separator system. Separator liquid densities are based on the Alani-Kennedy correlation
(see "Alani-Kennedy liquid densities" on page 311)and stock tank densities are calculated using
Amagat's law (addition of specific volumes).
382
Technical Description
Consistency tests and correlations
Another method of calculating recovery factors is to assume stabilized liquid consists of, say,
the Pentanes plus fraction, whilst the stabilized gas consists of the other, lighter components.
With these assumptions, recoveries down to the last pressure in the CVD experiment are
commonly reported in laboratory analyses in units of gallons of condensate per mscf of wet gas.
Laboratories calculate these using Amagats law. You can perform these calculations in PVTi
using input specific gravities and molecular weights.
Recovery calculations
From input CCE, CVD data and the separation system, PVTi can calculate gas and condensate
recovery factors from any supplied initial reservoir pressure to any supplied abandonment
pressure, for a depletion scenario.
Technical Description
Consistency tests and correlations
383
Minimum information
In fluid property estimation the following data provide sufficient information to construct a
complete set of example experiments:
The maximum pressure to use when constructing a depletion experiment (the default is to
use the saturation pressure.
384
Technical Description
Fluid Properties Estimation
Optimized separator
An optimized separator calculation can be performed. The method for this is discussed in
"Optimized separators" on page 343.
Technical Information
The default settings for the PVTi fluid properties estimation are in Table 8.12.
Table 8.12
Value
Equation of state
Katz-Firoozabadi
Kesler-Lee
Viscosities
Lohrenz-Bray-Clark
The equation-of-state and the viscosity model can be changed using PVTi: Edit | Fluid Model
| Equation of State...
The component library in use can be selected in PVTi: Utilities | Program | Options...
The correlation used for the plus-fraction can be changed in PVTi: Edit | Fluid Model |
Components...
Technical Description
Fluid Properties Estimation
385
Always use data at reservoir conditions, such as depletion experiments, and at surface
conditions, such as separator tests, when fitting a fluid model that is to be used in
reservoir simulation.
In "Weighting observations for regression" on page 390, there is a discussion on weighting the
observation data to get the desired fit.
This chapter does not contain a mathematical description of the Levenberg-Marquardt
algorithm, that can be found in "Weighting observations for regression" on page 390.
Critical properties
For pure library components, particularly the non-hydrocarbons and lighter hydrocarbons, the
acentric factor () and critical temperature (Tc) and pressure (Pc) are well known. It is generally
not justifiable to tune these properties.
Hint
386
It is very unlikely that the Pc, Tc and of H2O, H2S, N2, CO2, CO, C1, C2, C3, IC4,
NC4, IC5, NC5, and C6 differ from the library values. So do not use them in
regression.
Technical Description
Regression in PVT analysis
The critical properties of the heavier components are less well determined. The plus-fraction is
a mixture of many different hydrocarbons and usually the properties are determined by
correlations based on mole weight and specific gravity of the plus fraction as a whole.
Consequently the critical properties are only as good as the characterization method that
generated them.
Hint
The Pc, Tc, and of the plus fraction usually come from characterization. This means
that they are not well determined, making them ideal candidates for tuning.
Pedersen et al. have suggested that the molecular weights of the characterized components
might be a good choice of regression variable as this varies Pc, Tc and consistently, in line
with the chosen characterization method, see [Ref. 59].
Careless tuning of binary interaction coefficients often leads to a fluid model that
has convergence problems in compositional simulations.
The basic cubic equation-of-state uses the acentric factor to consider slight deviations in
molecule shape; the assumption is that all molecules are close to being spherical. The binary
interaction coefficient between light components and the heaviest hydrocarbon can be used to
compensate for the non-sphericity of the heavy hydrocarbon molecules.
A and B coefficients
The default values of A and B are based on the following assumptions:
1
The critical isotherm of a component has a slope of zero and an inflection point at the
critical point. In laymans terms this means that the component is pure.
That the determination carried out, for the limited number of pure components available,
can be extrapolated to all heavier and lighter components.
The values were valid for pure-component density and vapor pressure below critical
temperature.
In developing his equation of state, Tareq Ahmed explained why these basic assumptions are
violated in many fluid models, see [Ref. 61]:
1
Pseudo-components and the plus fraction are not pure components, so assumption 1 is
violated by these.
The heavier hydrocarbons and light components may not have the same A and B as the
pure components tested. Specifically, assumption 2 might not be true.
Technical Description
Regression in PVT analysis
387
Light components such as methane and nitrogen are well above their critical points at
temperatures typically encountered in PVT studies. Assumption 3 does not apply to these
components.
Hint
The assumptions upon which the default A and B constants are based do not hold
for light components, pseudo-components, and the plus fraction. This makes them
candidates for regression.
Varying the critical volume and Z-factor are equivalent in this case, so it is futile to
vary both at once.
This critical volume or Z-factor is only used to calculate the viscosity, so remember that in a
regression only the viscosity observations themselves are used to tune these parameters.
Caution
As only a few observations apply to the tuning of the critical volumes for
viscosity, make sure that there are no more than one or two regression variables of
this type in a regression run. It is much better to put all critical volumes for
viscosity into one regression variable than to vary all of them at once.
There is another option in PVTi that allows the constants used in the fourth order polynomial in
density to vary.
Caution
388
Technical Description
Regression in PVT analysis
High sensitivities
The first rule means that interest should focus on the most sensitive parameters, those for which
a small change has a large effect on the fit.
The Hessian tab of the Sensitivity Analysis panel gives an indication of the sensitivity of the
different parameters. The values along the leading diagonal of the Hessian matrix are most
useful, a high value means high sensitivity.
Hint
By removing insensitive regression variables from the set, the problem becomes less
non-linear and thus more solvable.
Kai Liu has reported success with an automatic regression technique based solely on selecting
the eight most sensitive regression parameters, see [Ref. 61].
Amalgamating strongly correlated regression variables of the same type (for example
Tc) in a single regression variable or removing one of the two strongly correlated
variables makes the problem less non-linear and thus more solvable.
Technical Description
Regression in PVT analysis
389
Note
By their nature automatic regression schemes do not make judgement calls that an
experienced engineer would make.
Tc, Pc and of any component with mole weight of C7 or heavier. (As these are effectively
mixtures of different molecule types and so may differ from library values).
A and B of any component with mole weight of C7 or heavier. Again because these are
mixtures.
This gives a large number of regression variables, many of which are very closely interrelated.
The next step is to apply a mathematical analysis onto this set.
Regress using the set of variables with the highest total sensitivity, for which no correlation
between parameters is greater than 0.9 or less than -0.9; and for which the lowest sensitivity
is at least 1% of the highest sensitivity.
The total sensitivity of the set of variables was taken to be the sum along the leading diagonal
of the Hessian. The sensitivity of a regression variable was taken to be the value on the leading
diagonal of the Hessian relating to that variable.
Note
This method takes no advantage of amalgamating regression variables of the same type
into a single variable.
390
Technical Description
Regression in PVT analysis
Use the saturation pressure measurement from the depletion experiment to create a
dew-point or bubble-point experiment. Weight the observation of saturation pressure
very high (1000+).
Weight the separator densities or GOR highly (500+) to guarantee that the right amount
of oil and gas are produced.
Weight the worst-fit observation the most and successive observations less and less
through to the best fit observations that retain their original weighting of 1. This guides
the regression to take more account of the worst parts of the fit.
Caution
Be aware of the errors in the observed data and do not be tempted to over-fit.
Models that are over-fitted cause convergence problems in compositional
simulations.
Technical Description
Regression in PVT analysis
391
392
Technical Description
Regression in PVT analysis
Highest total sensitivity (determined as the sum along the leading diagonal of the Hessian).
Lowest sensitivity is not less than 1% of the highest sensitivity (again sensitivity refers to
the terms along the leading diagonal of the Hessian).
These criteria could be adjusted, though you must take care that the criteria you choose define
a weakly non-linear problem, otherwise the effort of analysis will not show any benefit for the
regression.
Technical Description
Regression in PVT analysis
393
( for v < 0 )
3660
A% = 670v + -----------MW
( for v > 0 )
10000
R = 820w + --------------MW
( for w > 0 )
10600
R = 1440w + --------------MW
( for w < 0 )
N% = R A%
P% = 100 R
[EQ 8.215]
Where P%, N% and A% are the percentages of paraffinic, naphthalenic and aromatic
constituents respectively; is the liquid density in gcm-3 at 20oC and 1 atm, and n is the
refractive index of the true boiling point (TBP) fraction.
n
n =
+ 2I
1
------------- 1I
[EQ 8.216]
394
Technical Description
Wax and asphaltene precipitation in PVTi
0.02269
I = 0.3773T B
Hint
SG
0.9182
If a full PNA specification of the sample is available, the mole fractions can be used in
the normal way, over-riding the default estimates from this splitting procedure. First
enter the single carbon number (SCN) fluid; perform the PNA split, then type in the
measured mole fractions.
[EQ 8.217]
where MW is the mole weight of the hydrocarbon and the constants a, b, c and have been
determined for various basic properties of PNA species (refer to the reference for tables of their
values).
Note
The critical properties of the PNA species can be tuned just as for any other
components.
In addition to the usual set of critical properties, the melting points of the PNA species are also
determined, for use in the wax precipitation.
For paraffins, the melting point is given by the correlation of Won (1986), see [Ref. 51]:
f
T = 374.5 + 0.02617MW 20172
--------------MW
[EQ 8.218]
For naphthalenic and aromatic species, the melting point is given by (Pan, Firoozabadi and
Fotland, 1997 - see [Ref. 52]):
f
T = 333.45 419e
0.00855MW
[EQ 8.219]
Wax precipitation
In PVTi it is considered that the paraffinic and naphthalenic species of components heavier than
C15 can form waxes and that the heaviest aromatic component forms the asphaltenic liquid
phase.
Chemically, the waxes that drop out of hydrocarbon fluids at lower temperatures, are known to
contain paraffins and, to a lesser extent, naphthalenes.
In PVTi the method of Pedersen et al. (see [Ref. 55]) has been improved to use the paraffin and
naphthalene components, rather than a wax forming component. This means that the critical
properties correlations for the paraffins and naphthalenes, as given by the correlations in
"Critical properties of PNA species" on page 395, are used in determining the solid
precipitation.
Technical Description
Wax and asphaltene precipitation in PVTi
395
The wax is modeled as a solid-solution and so we can apply an adjusted liquid fugacity and
solve for the wax phase using a full multiphase equation-of-state flash calculation. For nonPNA species the solid fugacity is e50 , which effectively means that they cannot form wax.
The adjustment to the liquid fugacity is given by:
f
f
f
h
c Pi
c Pi T i
T
T
S
L
- 1 -----i ---------- ln ----f pure i ( P,T ) = f pure i ( P,T ) exp ---------if 1 -----i --------- T
R
R
T
T
RT i
[EQ 8.220]
where h fi is the enthalpy of fusion for component i; cPi is its heat capacity of fusion; and Tfi
is its melting point temperature.
Enthalpy of fusion
The enthalpy of fusion for paraffins comes from the correlation by Won [Ref. 51]:
f
[EQ 8.221]
h i = 0.1426MW i T i
For napthalenes the correlation of Lira-Galeana et. al. (1996) [Ref. 56] was used:
f
[EQ 8.222]
h i = 0.0527MW i T i
For aromatics the correlation of Pan et al. [Ref. 52] was used:
f
[EQ 8.223]
h i = 11.2T i
c Pi = 0.3033MW i 4.635 10 MW i T
[EQ 8.224]
396
Technical Description
Wax and asphaltene precipitation in PVTi
[EQ 8.225]
where kij is the binary interaction coefficient between the ith and jth components; Vc is the
critical volume of the ith or jth component; A is the Cheuh-Prausnitz parameter, which can be
varied as a special regression variable, the value used for interactions with the heaviest
hydrocarbon is 10A; has been fitted using a number of asphaltene data-sets and is 6.0 for
interactions involving hydrocarbons with mole weights less than that of SCN C7. It is zero for
interactions involving hydrocarbons C7 and heavier, except for the heaviest aromatic
component for which it is 12.0.
This scheme is identical to the Cheuh-Prausnitz scheme for hydrocarbons up to C6, when the
PNA split is not made, the Cheuh-Prausnitz binaries are the same as in pre-2002A versions of
PVTi.
For P, N and all A species apart from the heaviest aromatic, the binary interactions are zero. The
strong interactions between the heaviest aromatic component and the light components creates
the conditions for a precipitating asphaltenic liquid phase, which maximizes near the bubble
line. Thus mimicking the behavior witnessed in laboratory tests.
Discussion
PVTi uses a consistent, single fluid model for all calculations, so the critical properties used in
matching, say, the differential liberation experiment, are used in calculating the wax appearance
temperature. Consequently all the observations, including those of the solid phase, can be
regressed at once, leading to a more consistent and complete single description for use in both
reservoir and process simulations.
Technical Description
Wax and asphaltene precipitation in PVTi
397
It is important that the sample being cleaned has heavier components than the oilbased mud, so that there is an uncontaminated point to use in constructing the
straight line.
If the composition of the oil-based mud is known, it is better to use the subtraction method
described in "Removing oil-based mud contamination by subtraction" on page 399.
398
Technical Description
Cleaning samples contaminated with oil-based mud
The restriction that the oil-based mud contain components C10 - C23 does not apply
here. The mud can be of any composition.
Note
The assumption that there are uncontaminated components, heavier than the oil-based
mud components, is not necessary for this method.
Hint
If the composition is known, the subtraction method is a better choice than the
skimming method.
Technical Description
Cleaning samples contaminated with oil-based mud
399
Mixing
Mixing is an addition of the two samples. If the mole fraction of the second sample is specified,
the mixture is a weighted sum. If gas-oil ratio (GOR) is specified, this value is first translated
to a mole fraction at the temperature and pressure requested.
The conversion from GOR to mole fraction (MF) is as follows:
n Assuming n moles of Sample 2 are mixed with 1 mole of Sample 1, then F = -----------
1+n
RT
F - -----------------std
- where R is the universal gas constant, Tstd and
The GOR is then given by GOR = ----------1 F P std V oil
Pstd are standard temperature and pressure respectively and Voil is the oil volume at the
temperature and pressure you specified. If you do not specify the pressure, it is taken as the
saturation pressure of the sample
Recombination
In recombination, the aim is to create a mixture with the stock tank gas-oil ratio specified.
In this case, the temperature and pressure you enter are used as the first stage in a two-stage
separator. The second stage is always at standard conditions. The GOR you enter is the target
GOR for the mixture. This is used as an initial guess and the fluids are mixed in the usual way
(see "Mixing" on page 400). When this mixture is passed through the separators, a stock-tank
GOR is calculated. A regression is performed, adjusting the mixing combination until the stocktank GOR is equal to the target value you requested.
The mix applied at each iteration is recorded in the log window.
400
Technical Description
Mixing and recombination of samples
and "Enthalpy" on page 405 explain how the relevant keywords are used in ECLIPSE
Thermal to calculate the appropriate quantities.
For a brief non-technical summary of these keywords see "Outline of keywords for ECLIPSE
Thermal" on page 367.
K-Values
For PVTi 2004A you have the option of either using Crookstons equation (the KVCR keyword)
or Wilsons formula (the KVWI keyword).
Hint
Technical Description
ECLIPSE Thermal Export Module
401
The coefficients of Crookstons equation are written out by PVTi using the KVCR keyword. The
general functional form of the K-Value correlation we use is given by Crookstons formula:
D
K ( P, T ) = A + B
--- + CP exp ------------
TE
P
[EQ 8.226]
If a simplified version of equation [EQ 8.226] is used, given by setting A, C, E=0 that is:
B
K ( P, T ) = --- exp D
----
P
T
[EQ 8.227]
then B and D can be calculated by using at least two experimentally determined observations.
Alternatively, Wilsons formula can be used to estimate K-Values, which is given by the
formula:
P
T
K ( P, T ) = -----c exp 5.372697 ( 1 + ) 1 ----c-
P
T
[EQ 8.228]
where P, T are the pressure and temperature and K , P c , T c and are the K-value, critical
pressure, critical temperature and acentric factor respectively for a particular component. In fact
Crookstons equation is a generalized form of Wilsons formula, which can be obtained by
setting:
A = 0
B = Pc
C= 0
T
D = 5.372697T ( 1 + ) ----c- 1
T
E = 0
in equation [EQ 8.226].
There are also tabulated values for B and D for certain components. The central problem we face
though is that K-values for a particular component are not functions of just temperature and
pressure, as Wilsons formula would suggest, but also of the types and quantities of other
substances present. Consider the following. If we have a fluid of say 50% methane and 50%
decane then each component has its own K-value at a particular temperature and pressure. If
we now add, say toluene, to the mixture then the K-values of methane and decane changes and
we also have the K-value for the new component. This illustrates that changing the composition
of a fluid clearly effects the K-values of respective components.
Also, for heavier hydrocarbon components (anything above about C7), the K-values are an
increasing monotonic function of pressure. It is clear that Wilson's formula is completely
inadequate here as K=Pc/P is clearly a decreasing monotonic function of pressure. The full
Crookston expression can cope with such components by using the A and C terms.
PVTi can provide valuable assistance here because it provides its own experimental data using
the flash; as we know that the flash accurately reproduces experimental observations. The
ECLIPSE Thermal export facility then calculates the values of a chosen set of Crookston
coefficients so that the correlation best approximates a set of flashes performed by PVTi in the
pressure and temperature range you specified.
402
Technical Description
ECLIPSE Thermal Export Module
This correlation is unique to the fluid sample and specified pressure and temperature range and
ensures that the Thermal option in ECLIPSE Compositional is using accurate approximations
to component K-values.
Oil Density
PVTi writes out the keywords PREFT, TREFT, DREFT, CREF and THERMEX1, which
ECLIPSE Thermal uses internally to calculate the oil density of the fluid at a specified pressure
and temperature.
Algorithm
ECLIPSE Thermal calculates the molar oil density b o of the fluid using the following set of
equations:
bo
is given by:
b o = 1 Voil
[EQ 8.229]
where the molar specific volume Voil of the oil phase is calculated using Amagats law of partial
volumes:
Nc
V oil =
x Voil
[EQ 8.230]
c=1
and xc is the mole fraction of component c in the oil phase. The component oil phase volume
V oil
is given by:
c
c
Voil = MW
-----------c
[EQ 8.231]
where MW c is the molecular weight of component c given by the MW keyword, and the
component oil phase density c is given by:
c
ref
= ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------( 1 + C T1 ( T T ref ) ) ( 1 C p ( P P ref ) )
c
[EQ 8.232]
The reference density c is defined by ECLIPSE Thermals DREF keyword (or PVTis
ref
DREFT keyword); the standard temperature and pressure, T ref and Pref are defined by keywords
TREF (TREFT in PVTi) and PREF (PREFT in PVTi); the thermal expansion coefficient C T1 is
defined by the THERMEX1 keyword; and the component isothermal compressibility C P is
defined by the CREF keyword.
The quantities C T1 and C p are defined by the usual thermodynamic relations:
1 V
C T1 = --- -----V T P = PREF
[EQ 8.233]
Technical Description
ECLIPSE Thermal Export Module
403
V
C p = --1- -----V P T = TREF
[EQ 8.234]
Remarks
It is important to note that PVTis DREF, TREF keywords are, in general, not the same as
ECLIPSE Thermals DREF, TREF keywords.
404
Technical Description
ECLIPSE Thermal Export Module
Algorithm
The molar density of the gas phase bg is given by:
b g = 1 Vgas
[EQ 8.235]
y Vgas
V gas =
[EQ 8.236]
c=1
assuming no water is present. yc is the mole fraction of component c in the gas phase. Each
hydrocarbon component gas phase molar volume V gas c is obtained from the gas law,
c
[EQ 8.237]
PV gas = Z RT
Remarks
The algorithm outlined above assumes that Z c does not change as a function of temperature.
Z
is calculated by PVTi for each component by performing an EoS flash on a fluid consisting
purely of the relevant component. If a single gas phase is found then Z c is set to the value of the
Z-factor returned by PVTis EoS code. If a liquid phase is returned then Z c is set to ECLIPSE
Thermals default value of 0.96.
Enthalpy
"Algorithm" on page 405 outlines the three different approaches ECLIPSE Thermal can
take in calculating oil and gas phase enthalpies.
"Remarks" on page 405 then explains which of these approaches PVTi supports.
Algorithm
ECLIPSE Thermal calculates the enthalpy of the oil phase using a mole fraction weighted
average of the component enthalpies:
Nc
H oil =
MW H
c
oil
[EQ 8.238]
c=1
Technical Description
ECLIPSE Thermal Export Module
405
where xc is the mole fraction of component c in the oil phase and MW c is the component
molecular weight given by the MW keyword.
The enthalpy of the hydrocarbon components in the gas phase is calculated using a mole fraction
weighted average of the component enthalpies:
Nc
H gas =
MW H gas
[EQ 8.239]
c=1
Set the specific heat of components in the oil and gas phases and the heat of vaporization
at the standard temperature.
Set the specific heat of components in the oil phase and the heat of vaporization as a
function of temperature.
Set the specific heat of components in the gas phase and the heat of vaporization as a
function of temperature.
Solid phase enthalpies are only required in simulations where a solid phase is present.
Specific heats
The specific heats C coil , C cgas of a component c in the oil and gas phases are given by
c
is the standard temperature defined by STCOND. The specific heats must always be positive.
If oil phase specific heats are defined, the molar enthalpy of component c in the oil phase is:
c
H oil =
T st
[EQ 8.240]
For temperatures above the critical temperature, T > T ccrit , the oil phase molar enthalpy is set
equal to the gas phase molar enthalpy.
If gas phase specific heats are defined, the molar enthalpy of component c in the gas phase is
406
Technical Description
ECLIPSE Thermal Export Module
H gas = H vaps +
CgasdT
[EQ 8.241]
T st
c
c
1 c
H vaps + C gas1 ( T Tst ) + --- C
2 gas
( T T st )
where Hcvaps is the heat of vaporization at the standard temperature, defined by HEATVAPS.
If a solid phase is simulated, the molar enthalpy of component c in the solid phase is
c
H sol =
[EQ 8.242]
T st
Heat of vaporization
A temperature dependent heat of vaporization Hc ( T ) can be specified instead of either the oil
or gas specific heat.
If the specific heat of a component c in the oil phase is not specified, then the oil phase enthalpy
is calculated from the gas component enthalpy by
c
H oil = H gas H ( T )
[EQ 8.243]
Alternatively, if the specific heat of a component c in the gas phase is not specified, then the
gas phase enthalpy is calculated from the oil component enthalpy
c
[EQ 8.244]
H ( T ) = A ( 1 T Tcrit )
c
H ( T ) = 0
T < T crit
T T crit
[EQ 8.245]
[EQ 8.246]
where the constant A is defined by the HEATVAP keyword, the exponent B is defined by the
HEATVAPE keyword, and T crit c is the component critical temperature defined by the TCRIT
keyword.
Heats of vaporization are usually obtained at the normal boiling point T nb . The constant A ,
defined by the HEATVAP keyword can be found by inverting :
c
H ( T nb )
A = --------------------------------------B
( 1 T nb T crit )
[EQ 8.247]
where Hc ( T nb ) is the heat of vaporization at the normal boiling point. The exponent B for each
component, entered with keyword HEATVAPE, is usually set to a value in the range 0<B<=1.
Technical Description
ECLIPSE Thermal Export Module
407
Remarks
PVTi uses the oil and gas phase component specific heat coefficients (SPECHA, SPECHB,
SPECHG and SPECHH) and the heats of vaporization at the standard temperature (HEATVAPS)
for each component. As explained in the previous section, the oil and gas phase enthalpies are
then calculated using [EQ 8.240] and [EQ 8.241].
In the future this functionality could be extended so that you could specify in PVTi which of the
three options to calculate enthalpies you wish to take advantage of in ECLIPSE Thermal. PVTi
would then export the relevant keywords depending on which option you had selected.
408
Technical Description
ECLIPSE Thermal Export Module
Units
Appendix A
Units
General information
This option allows the current unit and temperature conventions to be changed. The options
available are:
Field units
Laboratory units
PVT-metric units
Degrees Kelvin
Degrees Celsius
Degrees Rankine
Degrees Fahrenheit
Any of the unit conventions are compatible with any of the temperature options. The unit
conventions may be changed at any point in a session, existing quantities being converted to the
new units. PVT-metric units are the same as metric, except in that pressure is measured in
atmospheres. In addition, it is possible to enter mole compositions as fractions (of unity) or
percentages (up to 100%), and pressures can be specified in absolute or gauge units.
Units
Units
409
The units for each data quantity are given in the table below.
Table A.1
Units
Quantity
Metric
Field
Lab
PVT-M
Length
metres
feet
cms
metres
Time
days
days
hours
days
Density
kg m
gm cc
kg m
Pressure
barsa
psia
atma
atma
Pressure difference
bars
psi
atm
atm
Compressibility
1 bars
1 psi
1 atm
1 atm
Viscosity
cPoise
cPoise
cPoise
cPoise
Permeability
mDarcy
mDarcy
mDarcy
mDarcy
sm
stb
scc
sm
sm
mscf
scc
sm
Reservoir volume
rm
rb
rcc
rm
stb day
scc hour
sm day
mscf day
scc hour
sm day
rm day
rb day
rcc hour
rm day
Formation volume
factor (liquid)
rm sm
Gas-oil ratio
sm sm
Oil-gas ratio
sm sm
Volume
Specific volume
m kg
Energy
kJ
Enthalpy
kJ kg
-ml
Specific heat
kJ kg
ml
Thermal conductivity
kJ m d K
sm rm
Gauge pressure
Depth
3
lb ft
(absolute)
410
Units
Units
m day
rb mscf
rcc scc
rm sm
mscf stb
scc scc
sm sm
stb mscf
scc scc
sm sm
cc
ft
-ml
3
3
ft lb
-ml
cc gm
btu
-ml
btu lb
-ml
btu lb
ml
3
3
m kg
-ml
kJ
J gm
-ml
J gm
ml
kJ kg
K
J kg
-ml
ml
btu ft d R
J cm h K
kJ m d K
mscf rb
scc rcc
sm rm
barsg
psig
atmosg
atmosg
Surface tension
dyne cm
dyne cm
dyne cm
dyne cm
Transmissibility
cPm d bar
cPrb d psi
cPcc h a
cPm d a
A number of constants that depend upon the unit convention are used. These are:
Table A.2
Constants
Quantity
Metric
Field
Lab
PVT-M
Gravity constant
0.000098066
0.00694444
0.000967841
0.0000967841
Darcy constant
0.00852702
0.00112712
3.6
0.00864
Atmos. pressure
1.01325
14.6959
1.0
1.0
Density of air
1.2232
0.076362
0.0012232
1.2232
Gas constant R
0.083143
10.732
82.055776
0.08205576
Conversion factors
Quantity
Conversion factor
Length
1m
= 3.28084 ft
1ft
= 0.30480 m
Volume
1ft
Mass
= 35.3146600 ft3
= 6.2898110 bbl
= 0.02831685 m 3
= 0.1781076 bbl
1m
= 2.20462300 lb
1kg
1lb
Density
= 0.45359237 kg
= 0.06242797 lb ft 3
= 1.0E-3 gm cc
= 16.0184600 kg m 3
= 0.01601846 gm cc
1 bar
= 14.5037700 psi
= 0.986923 atm
1 psi
= 0.06894757 bar
= 0.068046 atm
1kg m
1lb ft
Pressure
Gas-oil
1m m
1 mcf bbl
Gravities API
Temperatures
(deg K )
= T (deg R )/1.8
Units
Units
411
The number of moles in unit volume V of gas with an ideal gas Z -factor of unity, at
temperature T and pressure p , is:
lb-moles = p RT = 0.002635779 at p = 14.70 psi, T = 519.67 deg R
kg-moles = p RT = 0.042282930 at p = 1.1013 bar, T = 288.15 deg K
412
Units
Units
Symbols
Appendix B
Symbols
f iL
f iV
Ki
m1
m2
Pressure of mixture.
p ci
p ri
Temperature of mixture.
Tc
T ri
V
xi
yi
ij
Symbols
Symbols
413
B
i
414
Symbols
Symbols
Bibliography
Appendix C
Wilson, G.
Martin, J.J.
[Ref. 2]
Coats, H.
[Ref. 3]
SPE paper no. 10512, presented at the Sixth SPE Symposium on Reservoir Simulation, New
Orleans , January 31st - February 3rd, (1982).
Whitson, C.H.
[Ref. 4]
Pedersen, S.K.,
Fredenslund, Aa.,
Christensen, P.L., and
Thomassen, P.
Whitson, C.H., and
Torp, S.B.
Lohrenz, J.,
Bray, B.G., and
Clark, C.R.
Crowe, C.M., and
Nishio, M.
[Ref. 5]
[Ref. 6]
[Ref. 7]
Bibliography
415
[Ref. 9]
Cavett, R.H.
[Ref. 10]
[Ref. 11]
[Ref. 12]
Edmister, W.C.
[Ref. 13]
[Ref. 14]
Part 4: Compressibility Factors and Equation of State, Pet. Refiner , Page 173-179 , April, (1958)
Michelsen, M.L.
[Ref. 15]
[Ref. 16]
Reid, R.C,
Prausnitz, J.M., and
Sherwood, T.K.
Bashbush, J.L.
[Ref. 17]
[Ref. 18]
Hoffmann, A.E.,
Crump, J.S., and
Hocott, C.R.
Alani, G.H., and
Kennedy, H.T.
Dranchuk, P.M.,
Purvis, R.A., and
Robinson, D.B.
Wichert, E., and
Aziz, K.
Lee, A.L.,
Gonzalez, M.H., and
Eakin, B.E.
416
[Ref. 19]
[Ref. 20]
Computer Calculations of Natural Gas Compressibility Factors using the Standing and Katz
Correlation,
[Ref. 21]
Institute of Petroleum Technical Series, No. IP 74-008, (1974).
[Ref. 22]
[Ref. 23]
Bibliography
Standing, M.B.
A Set of Equations for Computing Equilibrium Ratios of a Crude Oil/Natural Gas System at
pressures below 1000 psia,
[Ref. 24]
J. Pet. Tech. Page 1193-1195 , September (1979)
Peneloux, A.,
Rauzy, E., and
Freze, F.
Sreide, I.,
Reffstrup, J., and
Whitson, C.H.
[Ref. 25]
Procedures for Reservoir Fluid Characterisation using an Equation of State Model, [Ref. 26]
, Report RE 88-8, Laboratory for Energetics, Danish Tech. Univ., Lyngby.
Calculation of the Viscosity of Technical Gas Mixtures from the Viscosity of the Individual
Gases,
[Ref. 28]
[Ref. 27]
[Ref. 29]
[Ref. 30]
[Ref. 31]
Whitson, C.H.,
Anderson, T.F., and
Sreide, I.
C 7+ Characterisation of Related Equilibrium Fluid using the Gamma Distribution, [Ref. 32]
Paper in C 7+ Characterisation, Edited by Mansoori G.A., and Chorn L.G., Taylor and Francis, New
York, (1989).
McCain, W.D.
[Ref. 33]
Sreide, I.
Improved Phase Behaviour Predictions of Petroleum Reservoir Fluids from a Cubic Equation
of State,
[Ref. 34]
Ph.D. Thesis, The University of Trondheim, Norwegian Institute of Technology, Department of
Petroleum and Chemical Engineering , April (1989)
Peng-Robinson Predictions for Hydrocarbons, CO2 , N 2 , and H2 S With Pure Water and NaCl Brines,
[Ref. 35]
Fluid Phase Equilibria, Vol. 77 , Page 217-240, (1992)
[Ref. 36]
Bibliography
417
A Compositional Material Balance Method for Prediction of Recovery from Volatile Oil
Depletion Drive Reservoirs,
[Ref. 37]
Petroleum Transactions, AIME, Vol. 210 , Page 19, (1957)
Calculation of First Contact and Multiple Contact Minimum Miscibility Pressures, [Ref. 38]
In Situ, 14(1) , Page 1-17, (1990)
[Ref. 39]
[Ref. 40]
Pedersen K.S.,
Thomassen P, and
Fredenslund Aa
Winn F.W.
[Ref. 41]
[Ref. 42]
[Ref. 43]
Joergensen, M. and
Stenby, E.H
Optimisationofpseudo-componentselectionforcompositionalstudiesofreservoirfluids,[Ref. 44]
SPE 30789, 70th Annual SPE Technical conference & exhibition. Dallas TX , (1995)
Pedersen, K.
Unpublished
[Ref. 45]
1997
[Ref. 46]
[Ref. 47]
[Ref. 48]
Riazi, M. R. and
Daubert, T. E.
[Ref. 49]
Ind. Eng. Chem. Res., Vol. 34, Page 4145 -4148, (1995)
Won
[Ref. 51]
418
Bibliography
Pressure and composition effect on was precipitation: Experiment data and model
results,
[Ref. 52]
Predicting reservoir fluid phase and volumetric behaviour from samples contaminated with
oil-based mud,
[Ref. 53]
SPE 56747, (1999)
[Ref. 54]
Pedersen, K. S.
[Ref. 55]
Lira-Galeana, C.,
Firoozbadi, A., and
Prausnitz, J. M.
Pedersen, K. S.,
Skovborg, P. and
Ronningsen, H. P.
Rydahl, A. K.,
Pedersen, K. S., and
Hjermstad, H. P.
[Ref. 56]
[Ref. 57]
[Ref. 58]
[Ref. 59]
Ahmed, T.
SPE 18532
[Ref. 60]
Liu, K.
SPE 66363
[Ref. 61]
Trebble, M.A.
[Ref. 62]
Aasberg-Petersen, K.
[Ref. 63]
[Ref. 64]
Hanley, H.J.M.,
McCarty, R.D. &
Haynes, W.M.
McCarthy, R.D.,
[Ref. 65]
Bibliography
419
420
Bibliography
AIndex
Index
A
Acentric factors. . . . 103, 169
Alani-Kennedy liquid densities311
Alkanes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Aromatics. . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Asphaltene and Wax System 69
CCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
CVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Cycloparaffins . . . . . . . . 298
B
Binary Interaction
Coefficients104, 172, 318, 336
Coefficients default . 187
Black oil tables
differential. . . . . . . . 189
Blackoil
Compositional simulation373
Appendix D
D
Data analysis . . . . . . . . . . 77
DBG file . . . . . . . . . .93, 186
Dead oil tables .171, 184, 216
Debug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Default Binary Interaction Coefficients
187
Dew point . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Differential black oil tables189
Dry gas tables. . . . . .183, 286
BLACKOIL section
keywords . . . . . . . . 161
EoS
Correlation . . . . . . . . . . . 182
C
Calorific values. . . . 147, 175
Cascade . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Cavett . . . . . . 103, 176, 301
Experiments . . . . . . . . . . 195
Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Index
421
Equilibration. . . . . . .136
Gas Reservoir . . . . . .136
Oil Reservoir . . . . . .135
VFP . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
Export modules . . . . . . . .133
K
Katz-Firoozabadi . . . . . . 147
Kelvin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Kesler-Lee . . . 103, 176, 301
Keyword errors . . . . . . . . 165
Keywords
PVTi. . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Fahrenheit . . . . . . . . . . . .409
N
Napthenes . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
NEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
NEW files . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Lee-Kesler . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Newton-Raphson . . . . . . . 317
Library components. . . . . . 95
Fugacities . . . . . . . . . . . .316
GI
nodes . . . . . . . . . . . .205
GOR
definition . . . . . . . . .148
GRAF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
GROUP section . . . . . . . .159
keywords . . . . . . . . .159
O
OBS keyword . . . . . . . . . 234
Observations . . . . . . . . . . 234
OBSIND keyword . . . . . . 235
Martin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
MES file. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Opening a project. . . . . . . . 95
Mixing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Mnemonics. . . . . . . . . . . 177
I
Individual observation weights235
Internal library . . . . . . . . .217
Isomers . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297
422
Index
Paraffins . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Regression
operation . . . . . . . . . 201
target . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
variables . . . . . . . . . 275
SPLIT section
keywords . . . . . . . . 158
Peneloux . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Peneloux et al. volume shift 27
Peng-Robinson . . . . . 27, 317
modified form of . . . 246
Phase diagrams . . . . . . . . 300
Plus fraction splitting. . . . 202
PRCORR keyword . . . . . 246
Pressure nodes
automatic insertion. . 222
Probability density model. 302
Program options . . . 145, 238
PSEUCOMP keyword . . . 247
PSEUCOMP section . . . . 162
keywords . . . . . . . . 162
Sreide . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Specific heat. . . . . . . . . . 147
Specific heat capacity coefficients262
Splitting. . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
SSHIFT keyword . . . . . . 264
Standard conditions. . . . . 265
Standard pressure . . . . . . 145
Standard temperature . . . 145
STCOND keyword . . . . . 265
Surface tension . . . . . . . . 320
Pseudo-compositional tables247
Pseudo-critical
temperatures, pressures313
SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Pseudoise
definition . . . . . . . . . 28
Pseudoised
EoS data . . . . . . . . . . 29
SYSTEM section
keywords . . . . . . . . 157
Pure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
PVI file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Saturation
liquid. . . . . . . . . . . . 146
PVO file. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
T
TBOIL keyword . . . . . . . 268
Schmidt-Wenzel. . . . . . . . . 27
SCN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Tiled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Semi-Continuous Thermodynamics105,
302
split . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
True-boiling-point distillation302
SG keyword . . . . . . . . . . 260
Rankine . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
SIMULATE. . . . . . . . . . . 261
SIMULATE section
keywords . . . . . . . . . 160
Simulation of experiments . 28
PVP file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
PVT data for ECLIPSE simulators29
PVTLIB annexe . . . . . . . 185
PVT-metric units . . . . . . . 409
Q
Quality control . . . . . . . . . 77
ToolTips . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
TREF keyword . . . . . . . . 273
Index
423
View menu . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Viscosities . . . . . . . . . . . 331
UNIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Volume shift
corrections . . . . . . . 147
Windows platforms . . . . . . 31
Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Winn. . . . . . . . 103, 176, 301
W
WAT100 keyword . . . . . . 282
Water properties
ECLIPSE 100 . . . . .
ECLIPSE 300 . . . . .
ECLIPSE GI option .
VFPi. . . . . . . . . . . .
ZI keyword . . . . . . . . . . . 292
ZMFVD keyword . . . . . . 293
Zudkevitch-Joffe 27, 317, 320
424
Index